project manual for - university of missouri

PROJECT MANUAL FOR:

3rd Floor OR Fit Out

University of Missouri / Patient Care Tower

4th Floor Fit Out


UMHC PCT AHU Modification


PROJECT NUMBERS:

CP150752

CP150753

CP150754

AT:

UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI – COLUMBIA, MISSOURI

FOR:

THE CURATORS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI

PREPARED BY:

TreanorHL

Attn: Robert M. Koenig, AIA

1811 Baltimore

Kansas City, Missouri 64108

Phone: 816-221-0900

Fax: 816-221-4992

Issued for Bidding

July 2, 2018

mmcgee

Snapshot

mmcgee

Snapshot

mmcgee

Snapshot

mmcgee

Snapshot

mmcgee

Snapshot

mmcgee

Text Box

Volume 2 of 2 Section 20-28

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

VOLUME 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND DIVISION 1

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Advertisement for Bids

Certification Pages

Table of Contents

1.A Bid for Lump Sum Contract 1.A 1

1.B Bidder's Statement of Qualifications BSQ/1-2

1.B.0 Supplier Diversity Compliance Evaluation SD 1-2

1.B.1 Application for Waiver SD 3-4

1.B.2 Affidavit for Affirmative Action SD 5-6

1.B.3 Certifying Supplier Diversity Agencies SD 7

1.B.4 Newspapers for Outreach to Diverse Suppliers SD 8

1.B.5 Affidavit of Supplier Diversity Participation SD 9

1.C Information for Bidders IFB/1-5

1.D General Conditions GC/1-39

1.E Special Conditions SC 1-25

1.E.1 Healthcare Construction Guidelines HCG 1-13

1.E.2 Scheduling Specification SS 1- 5

1.E.3 Existing Roofing Warranty EXR 1-2

1.E.4 Roofing System Manufacturer's Certification RSMC1

1.E.5 Contractor’s Roofing/Flashing/Sheet Metal Guarantee CRFSMG 1-2

1.E.6 Shop Drawing and Submittal Log SDSL 1

1.E.7 Operating Instructions and Service Manual Log OMML 1

1.E.8 Closeout Log CLOSL 1

1.E.9 Sustainability Report SR-1

1.E.10 Quality Assurance Log COM-1

1.F Index of Drawings INDEX 1

1.G Prevailing Wage PW 1

mmcgee

Text Box

TOC - 1

VOLUME 1 – DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

012100 Allowances 013329 Indoor Air Quality 014000 Quality Requirements 017300 Execution 017329 Cutting and Patching 017419 Construction Waste Management DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024116.4 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

NOT USED DIVISION 4 – MASONARY

NOT USED DIVISION 5 – METALS

051200 Structural Steel Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold Formed Metal Framing 055500 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 Rough Carpentry 064023 Casework and Millwork 066155 Solid Polymer Fabrications/Resinous Panels

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071800 Traffic Coatings

074216 Insulated Metal Panels

075419 PVC Roofing

076100 Sheet Metal Roofing

076200.4 Flashing and Sheet Metal

077100 Roof Specialities

078100 Applied Fireproofing

078413 Penetration Firestopping

079200.4 Joint Sealant

079505 Interior Expansion Joint Assemblies

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

mmcgee

Text Box

TOC - 2

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Panels 083323 Overhead Coiling Doors 084243 ICU/CCU Sliding Doors 071000 Door Hardware

087113 Automatic Door Operators 088005 Interior Glazing 088300 Mirrors

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

092116 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall System 092900 Gypsum Board Systems 093000 Tile Work 095113 Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096516 Sheet Flooring 096519 Resilient Flooring 096520 Rubber Flooring 096723 Resinous Flooring 096800 Carpeting 097200 Wall Covering 097300 Fiber Reinforced Laminated Panels (FRL) 097316 FRP Panel System 097319 PVC Wall Panel System 098433 Fabric Wrapped Panels 098447 Metal Wall Panels 099100 Painting 099600 Epoxy Coating 099619 Floor Sealer

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

101030 Tack Panels 101100 Marker boards 102113 Toilet Compartments 102123 Cubicle Curtain Tracks 102126 I.V. Tracks 102513 Patient Headwalls 102600 Corner and Wall Guards 102800 Toilet Room Accessories 104413 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 105600 Miscellaneous Accessories

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

mmcgee

Text Box

TOC - 3

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

122413 Shades

123559 Stainless Steel Tops and Countertops 123661 Solid Surface Materials

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

NOT USED

VOLUME 2 – DIVISIONS 20 THROUGH 28 DIVISION 20 – MECHANICAL

200000 Basic Mechanical Conditions 200010 Conditions, Bid 200020 Conditions, Jobsite 200030 Project Documents 200040 Duties of Contractor 200050 Material and Equipment 201000 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 201010 Basic Piping Materials 201020 Miscellaneous Materials 201030 Joints and Connection Methods 201040 Hangers, Shields, Supports and Anchors 201050 Basic Mechanical Methods - General 201060 Basic Mechanical Methods - Installation 201070 Basic Mechanical Methods - Related Work 201080 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 201090 Basic Mechanical Methods - Identification 202010 Electrical Requirements 202020 Drives and Guards 202500 Insulation 202510 Insulation Materials 202520 Insulation Material Schedules 202530 Insulation Application

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

210000 Fire Protection System 210010 Design 210020 Service Entrance 210030 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System 210040 Pre-Action Sprinkler System

mmcgee

Text Box

TOC - 4

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220000 Plumbing Work 222000 Plumbing Piping Systems 223000 Drains and Cleanouts

224000 Plumbing Fixtures 228000 Plumbing Specialties

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230000 HVAC Piping and Equipment 231000 Hydronic Piping 232140 Pumps 232300 Miscellaneous Piping 237300 Air Handling Units 238200 Terminal Units

DIVISION 24 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EXPANSION

240000 Air Distribution 243100 Sheetmetal Ductwork 243300 Air Distribution Accessories 243400 Fans 243700 Air Devices

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

250000 Temperature Control Systems 251000 Control System Requirements 252000 Air Side Control Equipment 253000 Hydronic Control Equipment 254000 Auxiliary Equipment 255000 Wiring Materials and Methods

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 Common Work Results for Electrical 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Systems 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 260923 Lighting Control Devices 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses

mmcgee

Text Box

TOC - 5

262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262923 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 264113 Lighting Protection for Structures 265100 Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

270500 Common Work Results for Communications 270544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFTEY AND SECURITY

283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

NOT USED DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

NOT USED

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

mmcgee

Text Box

TOC - 6

TreanorHL UM Projects # CP150752, CP150753 & CP150754

UMHC PCT 3rd and 4th Floor Fit Out UMHC PCT AHU Modification

20 00 00 - Page 1 BASIC MECHANICAL

CONDITIONS

20 00 00 BASIC MECHANICAL CONDITIONS

20 00 01 GENERAL

This Section includes procedural requirements for the Work of Divisions 20 – 25 to supplement the requirements specified in Division 1.

The organization of the Specifications into Divisions, Sections and Subsections, and the arrangement of the Plans shall not in and of itself divide the Work among the Contractors and Subcontractors nor establish the Work to be performed by any trade.

The “Scope of Work” and “Work Included” under each respective sectional heading, nevertheless, attempts to segregate the Work by known contracting activities. In the final analysis, the General Contractor shall be responsible for scoping the work for each trade based on local practice to include all the Work of a given type in the related proposal, regardless of where and how identified in the Bid Documents.

20 00 02 SCOPE OF WORK

This project is for a renovated hospital facility for the University of Missouri Columbia located at 1 Hospital Drive, Columbia, MO.

The Mechanical Work for this project shall include all material, labor and services necessary for and incidental to providing the following systems (respective Sections of the Specifications are noted in the right hand column):

1. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 20

2. Insulation Work 20

3. Fire protection system 21

4. Plumbing Work 22

5. HVAC Piping and Equipment 23

6. Air Distribution 24

7. Temperature Control Systems 25

20 00 03 REFERENCES

The Plans, the general provisions of the Contract, including the General, Supplementary and/or Special Conditions and specification sections of Division 1 shall apply to Work of Divisions 20 - 25 of the Specifications.

All provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply to Work for all other sections of Divisions 20 – 25 of these Specifications.

20 00 04 REFERENCES, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

All material and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., where relevant standards have been established (see also Paragraph 20 00 60). Material and equipment, which are not covered by UL Standards, will be acceptable provided they meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Products which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, lists, labels, certifies or determines to be safe will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards such as NEMA or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include test reports and definitive submittals.




CONDITIONS

Pressure vessels and pressure retaining safety devices shall be certified in accordance with applicable requirements of the ASME Boiler Code.

Definitions:

1. “Listed”: A product is “listed” if of a kind mentioned in a list which: Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspections of such production. States that such product meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.

2. “Labeled”: The product is “labeled” if: It embodies a valid label or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as UL, Inc. Production is inspected periodically by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.

3. “Certified”: The product is “certified” if: The product has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in specific manner. Production is inspected periodically by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The product bears a label, tag or other record of certification.

20 00 05 DEFINITIONS

The term “unfinished space” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall be a mechanical or electrical equipment room. These are rooms that are generally unpainted and accessible only to building maintenance personnel.

The term “finished space” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall mean any space not defined as “unfinished space” (i.e. occupied rooms, corridors, stairways, closets, etc.).

The term “exterior” or “outdoors” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall mean exposed to atmospheric weather conditions.

The term “interior” or “indoors” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall mean not exposed to atmospheric weather conditions.

The term “concealed” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall mean anything that is not visible in a “finished space”.

The term “inaccessible” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall mean located within walls or above non-lay-in ceiling (i.e., drywall, plaster).

The term “packaged” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall be construed to be a factory manufactured piece of equipment for which all components are totally assembled, prepiped and prewired within its own structure and ready to operate when connected to proper external mechanical and electrical services.

The term “cold piping system” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall be a piping system containing media at or below 79 degrees F temperature.

The term “ambient piping system” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall be a piping system containing media which is neither heated nor chilled and remains at a temperature range between 80 and 109 degrees F temperature.




CONDITIONS

The term “hot piping system” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall be a piping system containing media at or above 110 degrees temperature.

The term “medical gas” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall include gaseous oxygen, nitrous oxide and medical (clinical) air, all installed per NFPA 99.

The term “medical vacuum” as used in Division 20 - 25 of the Specifications shall include vacuum, installed in accordance with NFPA 99.

20 00 06 CODES, STANDARDS, ETC.

The material, workmanship and systems for Work of this Division shall comply with all applicable codes, standards, regulations and laws of the legal governmental jurisdiction at the project site.

Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable codes, standards, regulations, statutes, laws, acts, or which does not receive the approval of the responsible inspection authority, Contractor shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies.

C. Applicable requirements of the current and accepted edition of the following industry standards, codes and specifications shall apply to the Work for Divisions 20 - 25:

AGA American Gas Association 20 AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 24 00 00 ANSI American National Standards Institute 20 10 00 API American Petroleum Institute 23 00 00 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 20 10 00 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers 22 00 00 ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials 20 10 00 AWS American Welding Society 23 00 00 AWWA American Water Works Association 22 00 00 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institution 22 00 00 IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and

Fitting Industry 20 10 00 NIST Institute of Science and Technology 20 10 00 NEC National Electric Code, including amendments by local authority having

jurisdiction NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association 21 00 00 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 22 00 00 NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors

National Association 24 00 00 UL Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK




MATERIALS AND METHODS

20 10 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS and METHODS 20 10 01 GENERAL

This Section describes and specifies basic mechanical materials and methods to be utilized in the Work included in other sections of Divisions 20 - 25.

The Plans, the general provisions of the Contract including the General, Supplementary and/or Special Conditions and specification sections of Division 1 shall apply to Work of Divisions 20 - 25 of the Specifications.

Provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply, where and when relevant, to Work of other sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of these Specifications.

20 10 02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Work for this section of the Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the Codes, Standards, etc. as identified in Division 20.

20 10 03 RELATED SECTIONS of the SPECIFICATIONS

Requirements of the following Section(s) of the Specifications apply to Work of this Section:

Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Conditions

Requirements of this Section of the Specifications shall apply to Work of the following sections of Divisions 20 - 25:

1. Division 20 - Insulation Work

2. Division 21 - Fire Protection System

3. Division 22 - Plumbing Work

4. Division 23 - HVAC Piping and Equipment

5. Division 24 - Air Distribution System

6. Division 25 - Temperature Control System

20 10 04 WORK INCLUDED

Furnish material, labor and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of the following work where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary work in related sections of the Specifications (sub-section 20 10 03) to perform the Work completely.

Identification of piping and equipment for the work of Divisions 20 - 25.

Testing, adjusting and balancing of systems for the work of Divisions 20 - 25.

Cleaning of piping and equipment for the work of Divisions 20 - 25.

Excavation, trenching and backfilling for the work of Divisions 20 - 25.

Painting of piping and equipment for the work of Divisions 20 - 25.

Demolition for the work of Divisions 20 - 25.




MATERIALS AND METHODS

Concrete for the work of Divisions 20 – 25.

20 10 05 WORK NOT INCLUDED

Materials and methods are specified in this section for the work of Divisions 20 - 25. The Work, itself, is specified in the respective sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of the Specifications.

20 10 07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Special requirements for work shall be specified in the respective sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of the Specifications.



20 10 10 - Page 1 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS

20 10 10 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS

General:

1. The intent of sub-sections 20 10 11, 20 10 12, and 20 10 13 is to identify materials that may be utilized for Divisions 20 - 25 Work as specified for each specific piping system. Piping, hangers, valves, fittings and joining materials for Division 21 Fire Protection shall be Factory Mutual and U.L. listed as specified in Division 21 and may not necessarily be as specified in this section; however all methods and procedures which are not in conflict with those permitted by NFPA shall govern.

2. Respective piping materials shall be manufactured, fabricated and/or provided in accordance with the ANSI, ASTM, ASME or other accepted industry standard as specified herein.

20 10 11 PIPE AND TUBE

General:

1. All pipe and tube material shall be uncoated, unless specified otherwise.

2. Manufacturer's mill reports and applicable documents to certify the validity of procured piping materials shall be on file at the Contractor's office.

Steel pipe:

1. Steel pipe shall be specified by finish, size by nominal diameter, ASTM specification number, manufacturing process, wall thickness (by schedule number or decimal dimension) and end preparation as follows:

2. ASTM mfr. wall size end finish spec# method thickness range prep black A-53 CW/ERW Sch 40, 80 2” and smaller T&C black A-53 SMLS Std, Sch 40,80 all

PE/T&C black A-106 SMLS Grade A Std, Sch 40,80 all

PE/T&C galv A-53 SMLS Grade A Std, Sch 40,80 all

PE/T&C

a. Per ANSI B36.10, schedule 40 is standard weight pipe for 10” pipe size and smaller.

b. Schedule 80 in this pipe size range is extra strong pipe.

c. Standard weight pipe for all sizes 12” and larger is 0.375” wall thickness and are generally not referred to by schedule number.

d. Outside diameters of pipe sizes 14” and larger are even whole numbers (e.g. - 18” O.D., 20” O.D., etc.)

CW = continuous weld ERW = electric resistance weld SMLS = seamless PE = plain end T&C = threaded and coupled

3. All steel pipe shall be mill coated and rust free.

Copper tube:




1. Type K, L, and M copper tube shall be in accordance with ASTM B88. Tubing is available in various finished products and wall thickness, which must be called out as well as sizes being either “nominal” or “outside diameter” (O.D.) since there are overlaps in smaller sizes.

2. size annealed type range hard soft application K ¼”-2” x heaviest wall, underground

water (ASTM B-88) L ¼”-8” x general use, HVAC, refrig.,

plumbing (ASTM B-88) M ¼”-8” x lightest, gravity drains and vents (ASTM B-88) DWV 1-1/4”-6” x plumbing drains and vents (ASTM B-306) Refr./ACR 1/8”-4-1/8” x O.D. tube, refrigeration (ASTM B-280) Oxygen Service Type L ¼”-8” x Medical Gases above ground,

200 psig and less, (ASTM B-819) Oxygen Service Type K ¼”-8” x Underground medical gases and

medical gas greater than 200 psig pressure (ASTM B-819)

Cast iron pipe:

1. Hub and spigot soil pipe shall be accordance with ASTM A-74. Available in service weight and extra heavy, both with coal tar coating, 5 foot and 10 foot lengths, single and double hub ends, range 2” - 15” diameter.

2. No-hub soil pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A-888, CISPI 301. Available with coal tar coating, 5 foot and 10 foot lengths, range 1-1/2” - 10” diameter.

20 10 12 FITTINGS

Cast iron:

1. Screwed fittings and flange unions: 125# standard and 250# extra heavy threaded in accordance with ANSI B16.4 (except plugs and bushings which are ANSI B16.14). Available in black or galvanized, range ¼” - 8”.

2. Flanged fittings and flanges: 125# standard, flat faced in accordance with ANSI B16.1. 250# extra heavy, raised face in accordance with ANSI B16.2. Flange facing and drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.5. Available black and limited galvanized, range 1-1/2” - 12”.

3. Flanged elbows shall be long radius (1.5 x diameter), short radius elbow are not permitted, unless specifically noted.

4. Drainage fittings: recessed pitched threads for non-pressurized applications. Available in standard black uncoated, coated or galvanized, range 1-1/4” - 8”.

5. Soil pipe hub and spigot and no-hub fittings shall be accordance with ASTM A-74, ANSI A-112.5.1, CISPI std #301 and HS-82. Hub and spigot fittings available in service weight and extra heavy, coal tar coating, range 2” - 15” diameter. No-hub fittings with coal tar coating, range 1-1/2” - 10”.

Forged steel:




1. Fittings: 2000#, 3000# and 6000# threaded in accordance with MSS SP49 - SP50. 3000# and 6000# socket weld in accordance with ANSI B16.11/MSS SP79. Available black and electro zinc plated; socket weld for schedule 80 bore. Range 1/8” - 4”.

2. Unions: 3000# threaded and socket weld, steel to steel and brass to steel; 6000# threaded and socket weld, steel to steel only all in accordance with MSS SP83. Available 3000# black and electro zinc plated, 6000# black only, range 1/8” - 4”.

3. “Weldolets, Threadolets, Sockolets and Elbolets”: In accordance with ANSI B36.10/ASTM A216, except Elbolets which are ANSI B16.11. Weldolets available standard and extra strong, black only, range 1/8” - 24”. Others available 3000# and 6000#, black only, range 1/8” - 4” (limited). Source: Bonney Forge.

Butt weld:

1. Butt welding fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM A-234 and ANSI B16.9. End preparation of butt welding fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.25.

2. Elbows shall be long radius (1.5 x diameter), short radius elbows, and 180-degree returns are not permitted, unless specifically noted.

Forged steel flanges:

1. 150# and 300# forged steel flanges shall be manufactured to the requirements of ASTM A-181 with dimension in accordance to ANSI B16.5. Flange faces shall be flat or raised face as required.

2. Forged steel flanges shall be furnished as weld neck pattern. Slip-on, lightweight slip-on (drilled to 125# ANSI standards) and orifice flanges shall be provided only where specified and/or noted.

Copper (alloy and bronze) shall be in conformance with the following ANSI specifications:

1. Cast bronze threaded fittings: ANSI B16.15

2. Cast copper alloy solder fittings: ANSI B16.18

3. Wrought copper pressure solder fittings: ANSI B16.22

4. Cast copper DWV solder fittings: ANSI B16.23

5. Cast bronze flanged fittings: ANSI B16.24

6. Cast copper alloy for flared tubing: ANSI B16.26

7. Wrought copper DWV solder fittings: ANSI B16.29

8. Short radius 90 degrees elbows and 180 degree returns are not permitted, unless

specified and/or specifically noted.

Grooved:

1. All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer made in accordance with ANSI B-31.1, B-31.9. Fittings shall be ANSI 150#, 300# cast of ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Fittings shall have an enamel finish. Segmentally welded fittings are not acceptable.

2. Only the following fittings will be accepted: Long radius (1.5 x diameter) 90° and 45° elbows, tee, reducing tee, concentric/eccentric reducers, and flange adapter nipples. Flange rings and reducing couplings are not acceptable.

Ductile iron:

1. Ductile iron fittings shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 with thickness equal to Class 54 ductile iron pipe in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.




2. Ductile iron fittings shall be cement mortar lined with bituminous seal coat and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

3. Ductile iron fitting shall be exterior coated with bituminous and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C106.

Miscellaneous

1. Dielectric waterways:

2. Dielectric waterways shall be required in piping systems where an electrically insulated connection is needed to separate dissimilar metals from producing galvanic or electrolytic action. Unions shall be Victaulic or Clearflow.

3. Steel threaded nipples:

4. General use: Made from ASTM A-120 pipe in standard (schedule 40) and extra strong (schedule 80). Available black and galvanized, range 1/8” - 6” pipe diameters.

5. High-pressure application: Made from ASTM A-53 seamless pipe and ASTM A106 seamless pressure tube in standard (schedule 40) and extra strong (schedule 80). Available black only, range 2” - 6” pipe diameters.

6. Close nipples are not permitted.

20 10 13 VALVES

General:

1. It is indented that valves specifications are for high quality HVAC / Plumbing applications, not lesser quality “Contractor / Value / Economy” series. Valves produced internationally shall be from the Manufacturer’s owned facilities. Valves shall not be manufactured by third party OEM suppliers. Valve submittal shall indicate where the valve is assembled and tested.

2. When two or more valves of the same type are to be used in the same service, all valves of this type shall be of the same manufacturer.

3. Only general valve series are specified. Valves shall have all options, trim, seat material, and accessories as specified whether or not listed as a prefix, suffix or valve number.

4. All valve manufacturers and models listed shall be considered as “acceptable manufacturers” and may be submitted without concern from subsection 20 00 62

5. All valves for use in “cold” piping shall have stem or neck extensions allowing proper insulation and a continuous vapor barrier.

6. No asbestos packing allowed.

Ball Valve:

1. 2” and smaller: Bronze ASTM B584 (or low lead bronze for lead-free), 2-piece body, 600 psi WOG, quarter turn lever handle, blow-out proof stem, stem extension (for “cold” applications), full port, virgin TFE seats, all stainless steel trim, threaded or soldered ends. Nibco S-585-70-66, Apollo 77-240, Watts Series B-6081, Hammond 8311 or approved equivalent. Full port valves 2 ½” and 3” the same model numbers as the 2” and smaller valves are also acceptable.

2. 2-1/2” - 3”: Bronze ASTM B584 (or low lead bronze for lead-free), 2-piece body, 600 psi WOG, quarter turn lever handle, blow-out proof stem, stem extension (for “cold” applications), standard port, virgin TFE seats, all stainless steel trim, threaded or soldered ends. Nibco S-585-66, Apollo 70-240, Watts Series B-6001, Hammond 8511 or




approved equivalent. Full port valves 2 ½” and 3” the same model numbers as the 2” and smaller valves are also acceptable.

3. 2-1/2” and smaller: Bronze 3 piece body, 600 psi WOG, quarter turn lever handle, blow-out proof stem, stem extension (for “cold” applications), full port, TFE seats, bronze trim, threaded or soldered ends. NIBCO figure 595-Y-66, Apollo 82-200, Milwaukee BA-360, Hammond 8613, Watts B-6800, or approved equivalent. Full port valves 2 ½” and 3” the same model numbers as the 2” and smaller valves are also acceptable.

4. Medical Gas and Medical Vacuum 4” and smaller: Bronze 3 piece body, 400 psi WOG, vacuum service to 29” Hg, quarter turn lever handle, blow-out proof stem, full port, virgin TFE seats, bronze trim, Type K tubing extensions with soldered ends, 1/8” NPTF port on tube extension, cleaned and packaged for oxygen service per NFPA 99, valve handle shall indicate service, and pad-lockable handle for valves in concealed spaces. Medeas 6802, Allied Healthcare Products 77-03 or approved equivalent.

5. Ball valves used for chilled water shall have insulated T-handle Nibco Nib-Seal, Apollo ThermaSeal, Hammond Valve Insulator/MS.

6. Gauge cocks where not specified or specifically identified shall be ¼” bronze 2 piece body ball valves with lever handle and threaded ends per the above specification.

7. Drain valves and air vents shall be ¾” bronze 2 piece body ball valves per the above specification, with ¾” hose end adapter cap and chain. In ½” through 2” pipe, contractor may use Webstone model T-drain.

Butterfly:

1. 2” - 24”: Class 200 ASTM A395 ductile iron body, threaded lug type, 1/4 turn, extended neck, peroxide cured EPDM molded-in seat liner, aluminum bronze disc, 416 SS stem, lubersized bronze or Teflon bushings, and stem seals material matching the seat material. Conforms to MSS SP-67 & API 609. Bi-directional bubble tight dead end service with no downstream flange required rated at 200 psi for 2-12”, or 150psi 14” and larger. Valve body shall an integrally cast top plate for direct flush mounting of manual or power actuators without the use of brackets or adapters.

a. Refer to subsequent paragraphs for operator type based on size and service.

b. Valves shall be chemically compatible with: up to 4ppm of Chloramines (NH2Cl, NHCl2, NCl3) 40°F-200°F, propylene glycol 0°F-200°F; and NSF-61 rated 40°F-180°F.

c. Where used in potable water valve shall be “lead free” per 2011 Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

d. Valve submittal shall indicate where the valve is assembled and tested.

e. Valves shall be NIBCO figure LD 2000, Milwaukee ML-133E, Hammond 6411, Bray 31H, Apollo LD-145, Watts DBF-03, or approved equivalent. The following valves are NOT equivalent NIBCO N200, Milwaukee CL series, Hammond 5000 series, Apollo LC series, Watts BF series, or Crane 200 series.

2. Service valves6” and less shall have a 10-position lever handle; balance valves shall have infinitely adjustable lever handle with memory stop locking option. Service valves and balance valves 8” and larger shall have position indicating worm gear operators with handwheel operator. Control valves shall have actuators as specified in Division 25.

3. Where valves are located above 15'-0” AFF provide gear operator with chain wheel and guide. Provide chain hoods where required, to prevent fouling of chains on equipment and to clear walkways. Terminate chains approximately 6'-3” above the floor.

Balancing Valves:




1. General: Balance valves shall provide positive shut-off for service and shall have adjustable memory stops to allow returning to original balanced position after servicing.

2. 3” and smaller: Valves shall indicate method for position of the throttling mechanism. Valves shall have integral pressure tap ports provided with “drip caps”. Balance valves shall be Nibco F1710/F737, Tour and Anderson 786/787, Bell and Gossett Circuit Setter Plus, Armstrong CBV, Taco, or Watts CSM/CSM-8IT, Macon Balancing STV/L Series or approved equivalent.

3. 4” – 12”: Valves shall indicate method for position of the throttling mechanism. Valves shall have integral pressure tap ports provided with “drip caps”. Balance valves shall be Nibco F737, Tour & Anderson 788, Bell and Gossett CB Circuit Setter, Macon Balancing STV, or approved equivalent.

Auto Balancing Valves:

1. General: Auto balance valves shall provide positive shut-off for service and shall have removable/adjustable cartridge.

2. Valves shall be Bell and Gossett, Flow Design, Tour & Andersson or Griswold.

Check:

1. Check valves installed at pump discharge size 2 ½ and larger shall be Silent type, size 2” and smaller may be swing type.

2. 2” and smaller: Class 125 (125 psi at 400°F, 200 psi at 150°F), bronze, horizontal swing, vertical up-flow, Y pattern, teflon renewable seat and disc in conformance with MSS SP80. Nibco 413, Grinnell 3300, Watts 5000, Crane 1707, Hammond IB904, Stockham B320, or approved equivalent.

3. 2” - 12”: Class 125 (125 psi at 400°F, 200 psi at 150°F), iron body, flanged, horizontal swing, vertical up-flow, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc in conformance with MSS SP71, type 1. Nibco 918, Grinnell 6300A, Watts 511, Crane 373, Hammond IR1124, Jenkins 624C, Stockham G931, or approved equivalent.

4. Silent Check Valve: 2-1/2” - 30”, Class 125 (125 psi at 400°F, 200 psi at 150°F), flanged, ASTM A-126 Class B, cast iron body, bronze trim, resilient seat. Nibco F-910, Grinnell Series 500, Milwaukee 125 Class, Mueller 91-AP, or approved equivalent.

20 10 14 STRAINERS

General:

1. When two or more strainers of the same type are to be used in the same service, all strainers of this type shall be of the same manufacturer.

2. Only general strainer series are specified. Strainers shall have all options, trim, and accessories as specified whether or not listed as a prefix, suffix or the model number.

3. All manufacturers and models listed shall be considered as “acceptable manufacturers” and may be submitted without concern from subsection 150620.

“Y” Strainers:

1. 2” and smaller: ANSI 125 lb. (125 psi at 353°F, 200 psi at 150°F), ASTM B62 bronze body and straight thread cap, ASTM A240 304 stainless steel perforated sheetmetal with .033” openings for steam and 1/8” diameter for water service. Mueller 351M, Keckley F-150, Armstrong F4SC, Spirax/Sarco BT, Watts 777/777S, or approved equivalent.

2. 2-1/2” through 12”: ANSI 125 lb. (125 psi at 353°F, 200 psi at 150°F), ASTM A126-B cast iron body and cover, ASTM A240 304 stainless steel perforated sheetmetal with .045”




openings for steam and ¼” diameter for water service. Mueller 751, Keckley A, Armstrong A-FL-125, Spirax/Sarco F-125, Watts 77F-D, or approved equivalent.



20 10 20 - Page 1 MISCELLANEOUS

MATERIALS

20 10 20 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

20 10 21 SLEEVES (NON-WATER PROOF, NON-FIRE RATED)

Piping passing through non-fire rated interior walls or floors shall be neatly field cut round holes with hole saws for non-masonry/concrete, and core drill for masonry/concrete. “Beating” an opening in a gypsum or masonry wall shall not be accepted.

Install Schedule 40 pipe sleeves where pipes passing through floors of spaces where water could leak to the area below (i.e., mechanical rooms, janitor closets, kitchens, etc.). ID of pipe sleeve shall accommodate pipe insulation. Pipe sleeve shall extend a minimum of 4” above the finished floor, grout the annual space between the oversized core drill in the floor and the sleeve.

In new construction, field formed walls or floors, the contractor shall install appropriate blocking or material or pipe sleeves.

20 10 22 WATER SEALS

All penetrations through interior to exterior walls or floors shall be sealed water tight using the methods below.

In existing construction, holes shall be core drilled to the manufacturer’s recommended size for the type and size of pipe to be sealed.

The annular space between pipes/conduits and interior to exterior sleeves and sleeve penetrations for service temperatures below 250°F shall be sealed with GPT Industries “Link Seal” Model S-316 EPDM rubber with 316 stainless steel hardware. For service temperatures between 250°F-450°F and model “T” shall be used. Closure seals sizing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's data and application.

The Contractor shall submit a schedule of sleeves and seals to the Architect/Engineer for approval indicating the following: carrier pipe size, location, type of sleeve - fabricated with dimensional details or purchased with manufacturer's support information, seal requirements - none, fire rated, non-fire rate or “Link Seal” with respective support data.

Sleeves and seals manufactured by GPT Industries/PSI, Flexicraft Industries, Advance Products & Systems, Metraflex, or equivalent.

20 10 24 SEALS, NON-FIRE RATED

All penetrations through non-rated walls, floors, etc., shall be sealed for draft stopping with caulk, putty, etc., designed for this use.

20 10 25 ESCUTCHEONS

Wall, floor, and ceiling plates shall be spun brass, plain pattern, chrome plated, spring type or setscrew fastening. Provide escutcheons for all exposed piping in finished spaces.




MATERIALS

20 10 26 ROOF PENETRATIONS

All roof penetrations shall be made in a manner that is consistent with the roofing installation and shall maintain the existing roof warranty. Coordinate with the roof warranty supplier as required.

Supports for roof mounted equipment shall also meet the requirements listed in paragraph A. above. All roof supports shall be anchored to the existing structure in a manner that will transmit all loads including seismic and wind loads from the equipment supports through the roofing to the building structure.

20 10 27 ACCESS DOORS

Access to mechanical equipment and ductwork of Divisions 20 - 25 required for testing, adjusting, inspection, maintenance or servicing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Doors for manufactured equipment shall be an integral feature included with the respective equipment. Access openings in ductwork shall be included with the fabrication in accordance with SMACNA practices.

Openings in building components for access to concealed mechanical work shall be furnished by the Contractor and installed with the building construction work. Access doors shall be located as indicated on the Plans or as strategically required for inspection, maintenance, and service. The model and style shall fit the building construction, fire rating requirements and provide adequate size and function.

Access doors shall be sized as shown on the drawings or shall be a minimum size of 18” x 18” and otherwise shall be large enough for purpose intended and shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel frames and door panels with double action concealed spring hinges, 1/4 turn flush screwdriver operated cam locks and prime coat paint finish. Access doors for various applications shall be as follows:

building construction: Milcor access door: flush door in dry wall construction (walls and ceilings) style DW flush door in masonry or tile walls with exposed frame style M (steel), Style MS flange (stainless) flush door in plaster construction (walls and ceilings) style K recessed door in acoustical plaster ceiling style AP recessed door in suspended drywall ceiling style CT (aluminum - wet

locations) flush door in suspended drywall ceiling style CF (aluminum - wet

locations) door in suspended drywall ceiling style ATR (fire resistive door) fire rated separation (walls and ceilings) - fire rated door

Access doors are not required for Work above lay-in panel ceilings.

Submittals shall indicate schedule of locations, sizes, types, adjacent building construction, finish, fire rating including thickness and type of insulation, conformance to UL requirements and associated labeling, metal and gauge of fabrication. Access door shall be as manufactured by Karp Associates, Milcor, or Higgins MfCO.




MATERIALS

20 10 28 RESTRICTIONS, GENERAL FOR ALL PIPING SYSTEMS

Do not use gaskets or packing containing asbestos.

Selections of material and equipment and options for substitution shall conform to the requirements of Sub-section 20 00 60, MATERIAL and EQUIPMENT.

“Bull head” tee connections are not permitted, unless approved by the Engineer.

Close nipples and bushing reducers are not permitted.

Slip joints are permitted in sanitary drainage systems only, on the fixture side of traps.

Mitered elbows are not permitted in welded pipe construction.

Solder for use in joints of copper piping for domestic (sanitary) cold water, hot water, hot water recirculating and softened water shall not contain lead.

Unprotected, non-smoke rated plastic piping material is not permitted in above-the-ceiling spaces used as return air plenums, or exposed in any occupied space.

Black and galvanized pipe, fittings, nipples and specialties are not permitted in water piping systems where copper and/or brass are the basic materials.

Short radius 90-degree elbows and 180-degree returns are not permitted, unless specified and/or specifically noted.

The use of pipe hooks, chain and perforated band iron are not permitted for hanging or supporting piping.

Power driven inserts and attachments are not permitted unless approved by the Archi-tect/Engineer on express request by the Contractor.

Welded attachments to the structural steel of the building are not permitted unless otherwise noted or approved by the Architect/Engineer on specific request of the Contractor.



20 10 30 - Page 1 JOINTS AND CONNECTION

METHODS

20 10 30 JOINTS AND CONNECTION METHODS

20 10 31 THREADED

Threads for all screwed pipe systems shall be American National Standard taper threads in accordance with ANSI B-1.201.

Threads shall be full, sharp, clean and free of fins and burrs. Pipe ends shall be reamed to remove internal burrs.

Threaded connections shall be joined using teflon sealing tape applied to the male threads only.

D. This sub-section does not apply to threads for compression, flare and sanitary drainage slip type drainage fittings.

20 10 32 WELDED

Welded joints shall be “V” type butt welds in accordance with ANSI B31.1.

The Contractor shall only use welders regularly engaged in the piping trades and certified by the National Certified Welding Bureau, using procedures set forth in ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, “Welding Qualifications”.

Contractor shall keep a copy of welder's certification on file at Contractor's office. Upon request the Architect/Engineer may request Contractor to produce certifications. Any pipe installed by a non-certified welder shall be removed if requested by Architect/Engineer.

All steel piping shall be cleaned of mill scale and rust before assembly. Welds shall be chipped and hammered after each pass and joints shall be built up to at least the same thickness as that of the pipe wall. All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping.

Architect/Engineer shall have the authority to accept or reject the welds and require random samples of installed welds to be removed, tested and inspected.

20 10 33 GROOVED

Grooved joints for grooved couplings and fittings shall be in accordance with accepted manufacturer's specifications and practices.

Grooves may be cut or rolled in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of pipe, sizes and thicknesses specified for respective systems.

Gaskets shall be suitable for the temperature, pressure and compatibility with the fluid contained therein. Unless specifically specified otherwise or incompatibility with the system, gaskets shall be EPDM grade E.

Grooved couplings shall be ASTM-A47 grooved malleable iron clamp type couplings as manufactured by Victaulic or equivalent.




METHODS

Grooved couplings for vibration isolation or as unions at equipment connections shall be similar to Victaulic Style 77; all others shall be similar to Victaulic Style 07.

20 10 34 SOLDERED

Soldered and brazed connections shall be made in accordance with recommendations of the current edition of the Copper Tube Handbook of the Copper Development Association or as hereinafter specified.

General criteria for soldered and brazed joints shall be as follows:

1. Copper tubing shall be square-end cut by varied methods at the Contractor's option. The ends of the tubing shall be reamed to remove both internal and external burrs. Note: For medical piping, medical vacuum may be soldered or brazed at Engineer’s option.

2. Joints for copper piping for medical vacuum, hydronic systems, domestic water, temperature controls, DWV systems and other applications of fluids below 250 degrees F. shall be soldered with 95-5 Tin Antimony. 50-50 Tin Lead solder shall not be used.

3. Joints in copper piping for gases, medical gases, medical vacuum, refrigerant lines and other applications operating above 250 degrees F., or where otherwise specified shall be brazed with Copper Phosphorus (BCuP Series), Silver solder (BAg Series), or other approved high temperature brazing alloy.

4. Cleaning of tubing and fittings, application of flux and heat, purging and cooling shall be in accordance with recommendations of solder and brazing alloy manufacturers for the joint type and material specified in the respective “PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE” in Section 155000.

Copper connections for medical gas, medical vacuum shall be made per the following criteria:

1. Work shall be performed in accordance with NFPA and CGA Medical Gas Piping Standards and Practices. At the end of each installation workday, medical gas piping shall be capped and tagged; piping shall not be left open.

2. Fittings and valves shall be purchased for “oxygen” service. Material shall be factory washed, degreased and packaged separately. When material is contaminated, tubing, fittings and valves shall be washed in a hot solution of one pound of trisodium phosphate to three gallons of water and rinsed thereafter with clean hot water. Do not use hydrocarbon-based solvents. Temporarily cap to prevent recontamination before use.

3. Brazed joints in medical gas systems using copper tubing shall be made with a nitrogen purge to prevent formation of copper oxide on the inside of the pipe. Do not use any flux or thread compound containing oil or an oil derivative.

4. Screwed joints shall be made with teflon tape applied to the male threads.

20 10 35 FLANGED

Flanges shall be flat faced or raised faced as required for mating flanges of valves, specialties, equipment connections, etc.

Carbon steel hex head machine bolts, ASTM A307, grade 2, with heavy hex nuts shall be used for joining 125 and 150# flanged joints, unless otherwise specified.

Alloy steel machine bolts, studs and heavy hex nuts shall be used for joining of 250 and 300# flanged joints, unless otherwise specified.




METHODS

Lubricate the threads of bolts and studs with an acceptable commercial product. Include data with submittal for approval for piping material.

Gaskets shall be 1/16” thick non-metallic type conforming to ANSI B16.21 and shall be suitable for the pressure and temperature of the fluid contained therein, shall be provided at all flange joints. Full-faced gaskets shall be used for flat face flanges; ring gaskets shall be used for raised face flanges.

20 10 36 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

Joints for hub and spigot and no-hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the CISPI, unless noted otherwise.

Do not use joint material which has deteriorated or which does not spread easily or smoothly.

No-hub couplings shall be NSF Listed and conform to the requirements of CISPI 310, ASTM C1277, FM1680, IAPMO 35-89 and gaskets shall comply with ASTM C564.

1. Band, screw housing, screw, and shield shall all be stainless steel.

2. 1-1/2" through 4" couplings shall have a minimum of two clamps. 5" through 10" couplings shall have a minimum of four clamps. 12" through 15" coupling shall have a minimum of six clamps.

3. Couplings (60 in./lbs) shall be by Anaco/Husky, Ideal Clamps, Tyler Pipe, Mission Rubber Company, Thermafit Industries POC, or approved equivalent.



20 10 40 - Page 1 HANGERS, SHIELDS,

SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

20 10 40 HANGERS, SHIELDS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

General:

1. All hanger devices (e.g. - concrete inserts, expansion anchors, clamps, pipe hangers, strut, etc.) shall be UL approved for the intended service. Material shall be applied within the load limitations prescribed by the respective manufacturer. Loads transmitted to the building shall be within the limitations of the structure.

2. Acceptable manufacturers of hanger material are Anvil International, B-Line Systems, Inc., Tolco, PHD Manufacturing, ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co., National Pipe Hanger Corp.

3. This section shall not apply to Division 21 Fire Protection.

20 10 41 HANGERS

Piping shall be supported from the building structure, walls, and floors. Piping shall not be supported from other piping, ductwork, conduits, etc. Loads shall be within the allowable load of building component that is connected to. Piping loads shall include, but not limited to, the weight of the piping, valves, specialties, insulation, pipe covering, pipe content, pressure test media content, wind, snow, seismic, etc.

Where piping is indicated on common trapeze hangers, racks, stanchions or brackets, the various trade contractors involved shall agree to a mutually acceptable arrangement among themselves, but each shall be responsible for the correctness and compliance of their work.

Pipe hangers, supports, etc. for “cold” piping systems shall have hangers sized for the outside diameter of the insulation in order to maintain a continuous vapor barrier.

Pipe hangers for all “ambient” and “hot” piping systems shall be the same size as the pipe, except at roller hangers or supports where the treatment shall be the same as for “cold” piping systems.

Hangers, and other supports, anchors, guides, etc. in direct contact with copper piping material shall be copper plated. All others shall be electro-plated for indoor use.

The use of pipe hooks, chain, perforated band iron, wire, or cable are not permitted for hanging or supporting piping.

Singular, horizontal, suspended piping above grade shall be hung with pipe hangers per the following schedule, unless noted otherwise:

pipe piping Anvil International type and sizes application figure number

3” and smaller not subject to adjustable ring, #69 expansion/contraction 4” and larger not subject to adjustable clevis, #260 expansion/contraction 2-1/2” and systems with pipe guides adjustable steel yoke, #181 (2) larger and anchors





4” and smaller copper pipe/tubing adjustable ring, #CT-99 5” and larger copper pipe adjustable clevis, #260 (1) all vertical risers riser clamps

steel #261 copper #CT-121

1. hanger to be sized for outside diameter of insulation and to be used with insulation protection shield, figure 167.

2. hanger to be sized for outside diameter of insulation and to be used with insulation protection saddle, figure #160 through figure #165.

Hangers, supports, etc. shall position the piping properly in the work, and provide for expansion and contraction.

Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level with riser clamps bearing on the building structure or pipe sleeve.

Pipe stands shall be field fabricated to meet the anticipated loads. The base plate shall be spaced 1” minimum above the finished floor with concrete or grout.

Wall brackets shall be field fabricated to meet the anticipated loads. The minimum brace angle shall be 45° from the horizontal.

20 10 42 HANGER RODS AND HANGER SPACING

Where “All-thread” rod is used it shall be galvanized, cadmium or zinc electro-plated. Where plain rod is used the threads shall be a minimum of 2” in length on each end.

Hangers and hanger rod spacing for metallic piping shall be provided and installed in accordance with the Building Codes or the following schedule, whichever is more stringent:

pipe size rod diameter max. hanger spacing 1-1/4” & smaller 3/8” diameter 8' on centers 1-1/2” & 2” 3/8” “ 10' oc 2-1/2” & 3” ½” “ 10' oc 4” & 5” 5/8” “ 12' oc* 6” & 8” ¾” “ 12' oc* * cast iron pipe shall have a maximum spacing of 10’ oc center with the hangers located near the joint.

Hangers for non-metallic piping shall be spaced in accordance with the Building Codes or the following schedule, whichever is more stringent:

pipe size rod diameter max. hanger spacing 1” & smaller 3/8” diameter 4' oc 1-1/4” - 2” 3/8” “ 5’ oc 3” ½” “ 6' oc 4” 5/8” “ 7' oc 6” & larger ¾” “ 8' oc





20 10 43 ANCHORING

Anchors for piping, ductwork, or equipment in new concrete construction may be suspended at the Contractor’s option, or as shown on the plans, from inserts placed in the concrete as it is poured-in-place. Mechanical equipment rooms shall have inserts placed at a maximum of 4 ft. centers.

hanger rod size Grinnell insert figure number 7/8” or smaller single - CB universal, figure #282 7/8” or smaller multiple - 1-5/8” x 1” continuous strut, #PS 449

Anchors for piping, ductwork, or equipment in new concrete construction, existing concrete construction or new precast construction shall be suspended from epoxy resin set anchors, installed per the manufacturer's recommendations set into holes drilled into the concrete. Anchors shall be UL and/or FM approved, and applied within the allowable working load ratings for the respective size. Cataloged load values shall be derated by one third for seismic allowances. Minimum embedment depth shall be 2/3 of concrete thickness. Field pullout test shall be performed when requested by the Engineer. Anchors shall be Hilti type HVA.

Anchors for piping, ductwork, or equipment in steel structured buildings shall be attached to the steel by bolting directly through the void in the bar joist chord or by using the appropriate cataloged type C-clamp or beam clamp. The roof deck shall not be used for supporting the piping or ductwork.

Welded attachments to the structural steel of the building are not permitted unless otherwise noted on the Construction Documents or where approved by the Architect/Engineer on specific request of the Contractor.

Anchors for piping, ductwork or equipment in “flexicore” precast construction shall be suspended from inserts placed as the panels/planks are set in place. Where attachment to the “flexicore” is needed where the continuous strut is not available then, specifically designed “toggle bolt” anchors with oversized washers may be used provided that they are placed in the center of the hollow cores located 8” on center within the planks.

hanger rod size Grinnell insert figure number 7/8” or smaller multiple - 1-5/8” x 1” continuous galvanized strut, #PS 400S

Power driven inserts and attachments are not permitted unless approved by the Archi-tect/Engineer on express request by the Contractor.

In all cases, anchor loading shall be based on hanger spacing, weight of the pipe to be supported when full and insulated, weight of any additional loads imposed upon the anchor, wind loading, seismic loading, quality of the material that the anchor is being installed in, etc. The Contractor shall verify in the field that the anchors used and the materials that they are being installed in are suitable for the load imposed and shall bring any problems to the attention of the Owner's Representative in writing immediately.

Where anchors are loaded in shear in existing concrete structure, suitably sized and installed wedge type anchors may be used. Wedge type anchors shall be Hilti Kwik Bolt II.

20 10 44 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

A. All materials and workmanship shall specifically comply with the above listed Building Code

with respect to seismic requirements for the support and anchorage of all mechanical systems





and equipment as installed on this project. Lateral forces to be restrained shall be as required by IBC Section 1613 Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Component Seismic Design Requirements and ASCE 7-10 Section 11 and 13 Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Components and Systems with the following design parameters:

-Site Class (ASCE 7-05, Table 11.4-1 and 11.4-2) D - Seismic Use Group IV - Seismic Design Category D - Component Importance Factor (Ip) 1.5 - Spectral Acceleration, Short period (0.2 seconds) (SDS) 0.18 1-second period (SD1) 0.15 - Component Amplification Factor (Ap) ASCE 7-10 Table 13.6-1 - Component Seismic Coefficient (Rp) ASCE 7-10 Table 13.6-1 - Operating Component Weight (Wc) Actual

B. All piping support and restraint details and practices shall conform to the publication “Seismic

Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” by SMACNA, 2008 Edition, and/or “Seismic Restraints” by B-Line systems, Inc.

C. Seismic restraint submittals shall be provided for engineer review and include, but not be limited

to, detailed drawings showing seismic restraint types, anchor type and attachment details, calculations and spacing requirements of unique equipment, piping and ductwork for this specific project. Submittals shall include floor plan drawings indicating equipment, ductwork and piping to be restrained, restraint locations and restraint component types. All submittals and floor plan drawings shall bear the seal of a licensed engineer of the State of Missouri.




METHODS - GENERAL

20 10 50 BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS - GENERAL

20 10 51 INTENT OF PROJECT DOCUMENTS

Install the Work in accordance with the Project Documentation and considerations enumerated in Subsection 20 00 01, GENERAL (Project Documents) and as described in Division 1, Division 1 supercedes.

20 10 52 ARRANGEMENT OF WORK

All Work shall be arranged so that hangers and supports for the mechanical equipment and materials shall be within the load limitations of the structure and the respective hanger and/or support.

Piping that is required to pitch shall have priority over piping that does not pitch. Work which cannot be changed in elevation shall have priority over that which can be moved. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction shall be made in piping and ductwork to maintain headroom and pitch whether or not indicated on the Plans. The Contractor shall provide air vents, traps, dirt legs, drains, lifts, sanitary vents, mechanical vent lines, etc. as required to install the mechanical systems for proper operation and maintenance.

Do not install work in the immediate proximity of electrical components (e.g. - panels, switches, controls, boxes, etc.) in equipment rooms. Drip pans above and/or around electrical equipment are not permitted.

Aluminum and copper products shall not be encased in concrete.

Work in “finished spaces” shall be concealed within walls, chases or above the ceiling unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install the Work to coordinate with other trades and to conform to the architectural reflected ceiling plan.

The work shall be installed parallel with the building lines unless specifically shown or noted otherwise.

20 10 53 COORDINATION

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate their work with the work of other trades, and with the architectural and structural drawings. Where physical interferences cannot be resolved between the trades, or when encountered in the field, the Contractor shall prepare composite drawings at a scale of not less than 3/8” = 1'-0” clearly showing the Work of Divisions 20 - 25 in relation to the Work of others to identify the conflict. Submit a proposed resolution to the Architect/Engineer for approval in accordance with Sub-sections 20 00 01, GENERAL (Project Documents).

1. Do not proceed with Work in question until the matter is mutually resolved among the involved parties, and adequate information has been submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. No additional compensation shall be granted for modifications and execution of the resolution(s). Modifications are to be incorporated in the “as-built” drawings.

Contractor shall review the Project Documents, site conditions, and the requirements of other disciplines, and shall report any discrepancies between them to the Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written permission for changes necessary in the Mechanical Work. Subsequent




METHODS - GENERAL

clarification(s) by the Architect/Engineer will not be a change in scope of the Work. The Contractor at no addition in the contract price shall perform any such modifications required.

The Contractor shall furnish and properly install all sleeves, slots, chases, openings, recesses, supports, anchors and anchor bolts required for his Work in coordination with the other trades as the building is erected.

The expenses for changes required by neglect in executing, coordinating or scheduling the Work properly or avoiding conflicts shall be borne by the Contractor precipitating the issue requiring the changes.

20 10 54 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Delivery, storage and handling of equipment and material are the Contractor's responsibilities. The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the following criteria:

1. Delivery shall be arranged by the Contractor (including Owner furnished items) for the expeditious and economical pursuit of the Work and to meet the scheduling requirements of the Contract.

20 10 55 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

The Contractor shall clean the respective piping system(s) that are included in his scope of work. All systems shall be flushed with water or air (depending on ultimate use) to relieve any congestion and internally cleanse the respective piping system. The Contractor shall provide all flushing media in sufficient quantity, inlet connections, discharge or drainage outlets and any temporary provisions to protect components, or remove it, to facilitate the flushing. Clean and replace all strainer screens and filters. Flush clean and drain all low points in the piping.

Owner’s representative shall be present for flushing, cleaning, and rinsing. Water treatment representative must check water after rinsing to insure all chemical cleaner has been removed and the Alkalinity of the rinse water is equal to that of the make-up water.

All pipe systems for hydronic applications shall be flushed continuously with 100% city water make-up until the water runs clean from all drain locations. Each piping system shall be subsequently cleaned with recommended dosage of an approved pre-cleaning chemical designed to remove deposition such as pipe dope, oils, loose rust, mill scale and other extraneous materials for a minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours then drained, refilled, and rinsed clean. Flushing before and rinsing after cleaning shall be supplying constant make-up water while draining at all system low points and drains.

New or repaired potable water systems shall be purged of deleterious matter and disinfected prior to utilization. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the health authority having jurisdiction or, in the absence of a prescribed method, the procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652, or as described in this section. This requirement shall apply to “on-site” or “in-plant” fabrication of a system or to a modular portion of a system.

1. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet.

2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200 mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.




METHODS - GENERAL

3. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system.

4. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination that contamination remains present in the system.

20 10 57 PRESSURE TESTING

The Contractor shall submit a schedule at the beginning of the Work of the piping systems that are to be pressure tested, and indicate whether tests will be for an entire or partial system. Entire piping systems shall be pressure tested at one time unless it is not possible or practical.

All piping to be insulated or concealed shall be pressure tested prior to the application of the insulation or concealment.

A representative of the Architect/Engineer shall witness all pressure testing. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer at least three (3) days prior to the test date.

Each piping system shall be tested per the method, test pressure, and test duration as specified in the Piping Material Schedules.

The Contractor shall provide all test media, measuring devices, inlet connections, test measurement connections, and disposal of test media. The Contractor shall protect, isolate and/or remove piping system components that cannot be subjected to test pressures.

Hammer each joint in welded or soldered piping while under test. Leaks shall be repaired and the test(s) repeated until the respective piping system is tight.




METHODS - INSTALLATION

20 10 60 BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS - INSTALLATION

20 10 61 GENERAL

The Contractor shall install all equipment and material as specified in the Project Documents. The Contractor shall review the installation requirements, and provide all of the appurtenances and accessories required for complete systems and a functioning installation. The Contractor shall be prepared to submit installation details and procedures where specified or requested for approval by the Architect/Engineer.

The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's instructions for the handling, temporary storage, protection and installation of the respective equipment and material. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancy or conflict between the Project Documents and the manufacturer's instructions, and request clarification. Unless there is a specific change in the scope of work, no additional compensation shall be granted for modification(s) and execution of the clarification.

Work performed that does not comply with the manufacturer's instructions, any approval or instructions from the Architect/Engineer, or that causes a significant and/or unapproved deviati-on from the intent of the Project Documents shall not be grounds for additional compensation for costs to modify the Work in a manner directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

All Work shall be installed to permit access and/or removal of components e.g. - coils, fan wheels and shafts, filters, guards, bearings, motors, mechanical drives, etc. that require periodic maintenance, servicing, repair and/or replacement. Equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways shall be arranged to permit access to valves, motors, motor and temperature controls, and to clear the opening of doors and access panels.

Welded attachments to the building structure are not permitted.

20 10 62 PIPING

All piping shall be properly installed and supported with adequate provisions for clearance from other work, for expansion, contraction, slope, anchorage and prevention of transmission of vibration.

Piping shall be generally installed parallel to building lines in the most expeditious and economical manner and to facilitate servicing. Piping shall be positioned and installed to provide noiseless circulation, and pitched to provide drainage and avoid air pockets. Valves and specialties shall be located to provide proper function and be readily accessible for servicing and maintenance.

All piping connecting to equipment shall be installed without springing and any strain at final connections. The Contractor may be requested to disconnect piping to demonstrate that the piping has been so installed.

Steel piping connections to equipment with rotating or reciprocating components shall be provided with a minimum of two grooved clamp type couplings per piping connection, which shall be Victaulic Style 77 couplings or equivalent. Copper piping connections to equipment with rotating or reciprocating components shall be provided with Mason Industries SafetyFlex model SFDEJ flexible joint. Air handling units with internal fan isolation are not included in the above.





Changes in direction in the piping shall be made with manufactured fittings only. All elbows shall be long radius (1.5 x diameter) unless specifically noted otherwise. Bending may be permitted on submittal for approval of a satisfactory procedure to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Bending is to be accomplished with hydraulic type equipment producing no mal-formations in the piping.

Full size branch connections and branch connections one size smaller in steel piping shall be made with manufactured fittings only. Branch connections two sizes and smaller than the main run may, in special cases with the Engineer's written permission, be made with manufactured fittings, weld-o-let or thread-o-let type fittings for welded piping construction, saddle type fittings for grooved piping construction or a pipe-to-pipe nozzle weld. Small branch connections for thermometers, pressure gauges, controls, etc. may be made with nozzle welded 3000# forged steel threaded couplings, thread-o-lets or saddle fittings. For insulated piping, provide branch connections with sufficient “neck” length to extend beyond the thickness of the insulation.

Changes in direction in piping systems using hard temper copper tubing shall be made with manufactured and cataloged elbow fittings. Branch connections and reductions in all copper tubing systems shall be made with tee and reducer fittings. At the Contractor's option, utilizing a “Tee Turner” tool and corresponding procedure may provide branch connections. These joints shall be brazed and not soldered.

Minimum slope for piping shall be provided in accordance with the following schedule, unless otherwise specified, noted or shown:

Type of Piping System Direction Fluid Conveyed Component Pitch of Fall Sewer, sanitary main/branch 1/8”/Ft. w/flow Sewer, storm main/branch 1”/40/Ft. w/flow Steam condensate main/branch 1/8”/Ft. w/flow Chilled/heating water supply/return main 1”/40Ft. from vent Chilled/heating water runouts to risers 1/8”/Ft. back to mains Condensate drain 1”/20Ft. w/flow Domestic water 1”/40Ft. to drain

All piping materials shall be physically cleaned internally and externally of mill scale, oxidation, grease, oil, dirt, mud, loose and foreign matter before fabrication and installation.

All open ends of piping and equipment shall be closed during fabrication and installation to keep dirt and foreign matter out of the Work.

20 10 63 VALVES

Shut-off valves shall be provided at all inlet and outlet connections to equipment, at major branch connections to mains, where required for normal service, and where shown on the drawings, flow diagrams or details.

Valves shall be the same size as the adjacent piping, except for control valves furnished in Division 25.

Valves shall be accessible and free from interference when operated. Valves shall be installed with the stem on or above horizontal. Butterfly valves shall be free to open and close without obstruction.

Valves shall be packed and glands adjusted before final acceptance.





20 10 64 EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary frames, stands, brackets, stiff-legs, hangers, etc. to support or suspend the equipment and material that require this installation arrangement. The Contractor shall be responsible for the size, quantity, location and design of the supports and suspensions. The design shall permit no deflection of the support, the suspension arrangement or related building members, nor impart any vibration into the building structure. Loads transmitted to the building shall be within the limitations of and distributed satisfactorily to the structure. Designs for supports and suspensions shall be submitted for approval to the Architect/Engineer. Any attachment to the floor shall be provided with a minimum of 1” thick concrete or grout between the base and the floor. All associated ferrous metal parts shall be painted or galvanized. Painting shall consist of one (1) coat of base primer on properly prepared surfaces and one (1) coat of rust inhibiting enamel, color selected by the Architect/Engineer.

Each exposed mechanical drive and rotating shaft shall be provided with a protective guard. The guards may be provided with the respective equipment or may be field fabricated. The guard shall be constructed to comply with the appropriate safety requirements of the National Institute of Safety and Health and OSHA. Provide adequate and proper access for speed measurements for all rotating shafts. Guards shall not interfere with the lubrication of equipment nor restrict the airflow into fan inlets. The design for field fabricated guards shall be submitted for approval to the Architect/Engineer.

All equipment except pumps, having rotating or reciprocating components shall be provided with captive spring type vibration isolation mounts for seismic and restrained service. Mounts shall be selected at a maximum transmissibility of 0.03 (isolation efficiency of 97%) at the lowest anticipated operating speed of the equipment.

Grease fittings for bearings shall be extended to accessible locations.

Installation Instruction

1. Equipment shall be set level, plumb, properly oriented, aligned and secured in the location shown on the drawings.

2. Shims used for leveling shall be of size sufficient to cover the entire bearing surface except where shims are used to level preparatory to grouting. Shims used in conjunction with grouting shall be located to properly support equipment at load points to prevent any distortion.

3. Assembly and installation of the equipment shall be in strict compliance with the equipment vendor's instructions.

4. Where specified, equipment shall be assembled, installed, inspected and adjusted under the supervision of the Vendor's representative.

5. Lugs, saddles, supports, covers or similar components which have been shipped separately or loose shall be located and attached by the Contractor by means of welds or bolting.

6. Holes in structural steel required for installation of equipment shall be drilled as required.

7. Contractor shall supply and install self-anchoring anchors.

8. The Contractor shall grout under the equipment to effect a firm permanent setting as required.

9. Upon completion of installation the Contractor shall remove all staging, blocking and construction debris from the equipment.





10. The Contractor shall check all packaged or pre-assembled equipment to make sure that all packing shims and blocking is removed before rotating, running or testing the equipment.

Equipment Alignment

1. The Contractor shall do a cold final alignment of all rotating equipment shafts and coupling assemblies even when they were factory aligned. The reverse dial indicator method of alignment is preferred whenever possible. The following requirements apply to alignment:

a. Initial Alignment shall be checked with all piping larger than NPS 1” disconnected from the equipment. Maximum misalignment readings shall be 0.05-in. total indicator reading (TIR) on the rim and on the face of the coupling hub for all equipment unless otherwise noted in the Equipment Data Sheet instructions. Equipment shall rotate freely, all bolts shall be tight, all bearings and couplings shall be lubricated, and all safety guards shall be in place.

b. Soft Foot. Equipment will be checked for “soft foot”. If the dial indicator indicates more than 0.05 in. (TIR) when any equipment to baseplate bolt is loosened, the equipment will be reshimed.

c. Final Alignment. The Architect/Engineer will witness the final alignment check on each piece of rotating equipment. Connecting pipe shall fit up to the equipment without the use of mechanical force. Connecting piping greater than NPS 1” will be bolted to the equipment one at a time, with the dial indicator attached. If the alignment changes by more than 0.05 inches (TIR), the piping will be revised until the alignment change is acceptable.

2. Shims used for aligning the equipment shall be stainless steel and shall be stamped with the shim thickness. The shim shall be large enough to cover the complete load bearing area and the total height shall be a maximum of 1/8 inch and shall be installed between the equipment's foot and the equipment's baseplate.

20 10 65 MISCELLANEOUS

Sleeves, inserts, etc.

1. The Contractor shall furnish and properly install sleeves, inserts, supports, anchors and anchor bolts required for his Work. The size, quantity and location of chases, openings and recesses in the building structure shall be the responsibility of the Contractor performing the Work that requires these considerations. Patching of oversized openings and finishing thereof shall be the responsibility of the trade or Contractor requiring the opening. Material and labor for openings in requiring structural framing including lintels and angles shall be furnished by the trade requiring the opening and installed by the General Contractor. Lintels shall be structural steel angles, channels, or tees of proper size and sections for the load supported.

2. Sleeves shall be provided for all penetrations through the building structure. Sleeves through floors shall extend 1” above the finished floor except where otherwise noted; sleeves through walls, partitions or structural members shall be flush with the exterior surface on both sides. Sleeves shall sized to include the pipe/duct insulation.

3. The space between the sleeve (or opening in the structure) and the pipe/duct or outside of the insulation of penetrations through fire rated components of the building shall be fire stopped, see Section 20 10 20 Miscellaneous Piping Materials. Penetrations through non-rated components of the building shall be draft stopped, see Section 20 10 20 Miscellaneous Piping Materials.

Unions and flanges:





1. A ground joint type union shall be provided in threaded and sweat joint piping, 2” and smaller pipe or tube size, down-stream of each branch shut-off valve, control valve and specialty item, the inlet and outlet connections of each piece of equipment, and where shown on the drawings.

2. Flanged connections shall be provided in piping 2-1/2” and larger at each manual valve, control valve, specialty item and the inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment.

Interconnections between dissimilar piping material systems shall be made with dielectric waterway.




METHODS – RELATED WORK

20 10 70 BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS - RELATED WORK

20 10 71 DEMOLITION

Miscellaneous:

1. Loose ends of mechanical systems shall be capped and/or sealed in a safe and secure manner approved by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Dead legs of branch piping are not permitted unless a cap is specifically shown on the drawings. Where a cap is not shown and the drawings indicate to cap piping, the Contractor shall remove branch piping back to the main and cap at that point.

20 10 72 CUTTING AND PATCHING

The basic premise of this Sub-section is that the cutting and patching (where required) are performed in existing building components. In “new” construction, the premise is that the building component is already in place.

The Contractor requiring the penetration of or the access way in the building structure to fulfill the intent of the Project Documents for his Work shall be responsible for the cutting and the subsequent patching in accordance with the following criteria:

1. .No structural component of the building shall be cut or violated without express approval of the Architect/Engineer.

2. The Contractor shall verify the presence of any concealed utility or service within the structure (walls, roof, floor, etc.) in question, and shall be responsible for maintaining continuity and/or replacing it.

Cutting of work-in-place in “new” construction because of error, neglect or damage inflicted shall be the responsibility of the Contractor precipitating the issue.

“Patching” shall be construed as the repairing or replacing of the building structure to return it to an original or new condition, in the opinion of the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer, as existed prior to the cutting.

Patching and finishing work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the cutting. The patching shall match all the substantive and visual aspects of the structure and adjacent surfaces. Restoration and finishes shall be as specified and executed in the respective sections, schedules and/or details of the Project Documents for the general construction work. Completed work and any special requirements shall be subject to approval by and satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

20 10 73 LUBRICATION

Provide all oil and grease for the operation of all equipment until acceptance. The Mechanical Contractor and Subcontractors shall be held responsible for all damage to bearing while the equipment is being operated by them up to the date of acceptance of the equipment. Protect all bearings during installation and thoroughly grease steel shafts and other unpainted steel surfaces to prevent corrosion. All motors and other equipment shall be provided with covers as required for proper protection during construction. For equipment that is received void (dry) of lubrication the Contractor shall lubricate the equipment before storing to prevent internal damage to the equipment.




METHODS – RELATED WORK

20 10 74 DRAINING, FILLING AND VENTING SYSTEMS

The Contractor shall provide all required labor for draining, filling and venting of new or modified systems as many times as required during construction and for all phasing activities.

Where draining and filling systems affects other systems or the Owner’s normal operations, then they shall be scheduled at least 24 hours in advance with the Owner and shall be carried out to minimize such disruptions.



20 10 80 - Page 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING

20 10 80 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions apply to this section.

B. This scope of services specifies the requirements and procedures for mechanical systems

testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. The test and balance work will be performed by the Owner’s personnel or an independent third party hired by the Owner. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to assist as outlined below.

C. The Owner’s representative will Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems

which are shown in the construction documents. 1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges, including variable volume and constant

volume systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust air systems. 4. Hydronic systems. 5. Steam distribution systems. 6. Cooling towers. 7. Verify temperature control system operation. 8. Domestic hot water recirculation systems.

D. The contractor’s responsibilities are as follows:

1. Distribute the project schedule and notify the Owner’s Representative one-hundred-sixty-eight (168) days prior to the schedule date for balancing the system.

2. When scheduling completion of all work required of the Contractor by the contract documents, contractor shall schedule a four (4) week allowance for the testing and balancing firm to complete the testing and balancing work.

3. Cooperate with the testing and balancing firm and make all necessary preparations for the TAB efforts.

4. Complete the following work prior to requesting the TAB effort. a. Clean and flush all piping systems. b. Clean strainers. c. Pressure and Leak test and make tight all piping systems. d. Pressure and leak test ductwork. e. Fill all piping systems with clean water. f. Clean and seal all ductwork systems. g. Service and tag all equipment. h. Set and align all motors and drives. i. Start up and prove all equipment and systems. j. Make preliminary settings on all control devices and have all

systems operational. k. Replace air filters. l. Open all new balance dampers. m. Operate all systems successfully for twenty-four (24) hours

minimum. 5. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 6. Set fan belt tension. 7. Confirm proper fan and pump rotation.



20 10 80 - Page 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING

8. Patch insulation, ductwork and housing, using materials identical to those removed.

9. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks. 10. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. 11. Attend a coordination meeting prior to the balancing of the system and a

coordination meeting following the balancing of the system. 12. Provide a complete set of as-built drawings prior to the TAB effort. 13. Provide craftsmen of the proper trade to work with the TAB firm to make

adjustments and installation changes as required. 14. Provide and change out fan sheaves when and if required by the TAB firm. 15. Dedicate the resources to accommodate all changes identified by the test and

balance firm in a timely manner. 16. If a significant rebalance (Owner’s determination) of the HVAC system is required

due to the Contractor’s failure to properly install and check out the HVAC system, the cost of rebalancing the system shall be borne by the Contractor.

E. Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting and balancing procedures, a conference with the

Owner’s representative, Engineer and the Test and Balance Agency’s representative will be held. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting and balancing.

F. Test, adjust and balance the air conditioning systems during summer season and heating

systems during winter season. This includes at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg. F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg. F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design conditions. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.

G. Sequence TAB work to commence after completion of punchlist work has allowed start-up of

air systems plus 10 days for commissioning of HVAC controls.




METHODS - IDENTIFICATION

20 10 90 BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS - IDENTIFICATION

20 10 91 GENERAL

This Sub-section specifies basic materials and methods for identification that shall apply to systems specified in other sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of the Specifications.

The Contractor shall submit schedules and listings of Work to be identified indicating color code, material, name plate information and method of application for approval prior to performing the Work.

20 10 92 REFERENCES

All provisions and conditions cited in this Sub-section shall apply to Work of all other sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of these Specifications, where and when relevant.

Applicable requirements of the current and accepted edition of the following codes and standards shall apply to the Work of this Sub-section:

1. ANSI/ASME A 13.1 - “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems”.

2. NFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities

3. CGA Pamphlet C-9 - “Standard Color-Marking of Compressed Gas Cylinders Intended for Medical Use in the U.S.A”.


Each respective Contractor and Subcontractor shall identify the applicable components of his Work in accordance with specifications hereinafter enumerated or where required by other sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of the Specifications.

1. All equipment items (i.e., chillers, air handling units, fans, pumps, boilers, etc.).

2. All chilled water, condenser water, heating water, steam and condensate, plumbing, and fire protection valves both new and existing.

3. All piping systems identifying the system type and direction of flow.

4. All control devices and panels.

20 10 94 SUBMITTALS

Contractor shall submit shop drawings for approval in accordance with Division 1.

Provide an Identification Product Schedule consisting of the following minimum information:

- Material - type of identification product. - System - indicate which system or equipment materials will be used for. - Manufacturer - Manufacturer's name, product name and model numbers. - Accessories - Miscellaneous materials used in affixing identification.

Provide manufacturer's technical product sheet and recommended installation instructions.

Provide color list/schedule and lettering sizes for pipe markers, valve tags, and equipment nameplates.





Provide a valve tag list for approval prior to ordering or making valve tags.

20 10 95 GENERAL METHODS FOR IDENTIFICATION

All surfaces to receive identification nameplates or markers shall be clean, degreased, dry, free of oxidation and prepared per manufacturer's recommendations.

Plastic nameplates shall be installed with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners. Do not use adhesives.

Tags shall be installed with corrosion-resistant chain and end fasteners.

Pipe and duct markers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

Valve tag list for each separate trade i.e., mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and temperature control shall each provide a valve tag list in electronic format or under glass in a suitable frame located in a location approved by Architect/Engineer.

Valve tag information is required on “as-built” drawing submittals.

Acceptable Manufacturers:

Products of the following manufacturers may be considered

1. Seton Nameplate Corp.

2. Brady Signmark Division

3. Craftmark Identification Systems

4. D & G Sign and Label

20 10 96 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

All piping, bare pipe or insulated, exposed or concealed, shall be identified by one of the methods specified herein.

Markers shall be installed in clear view; aligned with axis of pipe; located at not more than twenty-five foot (25') intervals on straight runs, risers and drops; located adjacent to each valve, control device and tee fitting; and located on each side of penetrations of the building structure and non-accessible enclosures.

The following schedule shall govern label types for each application:

Location Type Mechanical Rooms II Above Lay-in Ceilings I Exterior/Outdoors III

1. Pressure Sensitive Tape (Type I): Vinyl pressure sensitive tape color coded and lettered in accordance with ANSI A13.1 for label of service. Flow direction shall be separately labeled with 2” wide pressure sensitive tape. The flow arrow band shall overlap the service label to secure it in place and shall not be less than two complete wraps around the pipe.





2. Plastic Pipe Markers (Type II): Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A13.1 requirements, semi-rigid plastic, pre-formed to fit curvature of pipe or pipe insulation, color coded and imprinted with media identification and flow direction. Available in varied sizes for pipe diameter, wording and inclusion of arrow.

3. Outdoor Pipe Markers (Type III): Non-vinyl chloride markers specifically design for outdoor use. Color coded and lettered in accordance with ANSI A13.1 for label of service with direction of flow arrows.

4. Stencil Lettering (Type IV): Not allowed.

Medical gases shall be identified in addition at least once in each room, at zone station valves and at each story traversed by the piping systems.

All underground metallic piping shall be identified with continuous 6” wide x 0.004” polyethylene film, color coded, and imprinted for type of utility buried below located in the same trench as the piping and/or utility and positioned approximately 6” to 12” below finished grade.

All underground non-metallic piping shall be identified with continuous 6” wide x 0.035 metallic detection tape, color coded and imprinted for type of utility buried below located in the same trench as the piping and/or utility and positioned approximately 6” to 12” below finished grade.

The following legend, color, and lettering shall be used:

Service and Legend Color of Field Letters Materials Inherently Hazardous:

Hot Water Supply Yellow Black Hot Water Return Yellow Black Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black Domestic Hot Water Return Yellow Black Waste Yellow Black Vent Yellow Black Materials of Inherently Low Hazard: Chilled Water Supply Green White Chilled Water Return Green White Cold Water Green White Drain Green White Roof Drain Green White Fire Quenching Materials: Sprinkler – Fire Red White Health Care: Medical Air Yellow Black Nitrogen Black White Nitrous Oxide Blue White Oxygen Green White Medical Vacuum White Black WAGD (Waste Anesthetic Gas Disposal) Violet White Non-Medical Air Yellow and White Diagonal Black





Stripe Checkerboard

20 10 97 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

All valves exposed or concealed shall be identified with brass valve tags indicating the service of system the valve is in and the number of the valve.

Valve tags shall be minimum 1-1/2” diameter brass stock with ¼” legend identifying and ½” valve number both shall be black enamel filled. Legends shall be HVAC, PLBG, SPR, and GAS.

Valve tags shall be secured in place with a No. 6 brass bead chain or No. 16 brass jack chain. Chains shall be attached to the valve lever handle or around the valve stem.

An additional 10 consecutively numbered tags for each service shall be provided to the Owner for future use.

The existing heating water and chilled water systems are identified and a list can be obtained from the Owner. Additions to the existing systems shall start numbering at a multiple of (10) plus (1) leaving a minimum of 10 valve numbers between the existing system and the new (i.e., if the existing numbering stops at 66, the new number shall be at 81). The existing numbering convention shall be followed as closely as possible.

Balance valves that are not used as a combination balance/service valve are not required to be labeled.

Temperature control valves shall be identified with a ¼” “T.C.” legend and shall be numbered consecutively starting with major equipment and then terminal units (i.e., AHU-1 preheat, cooling, reheat control valves shall be numbered 1, 2, 3 respectively).

20 10 98 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

All major equipment items (i.e., chillers, air handling units, fans, terminal units, pumps, boilers, etc.) shall be identified with appropriately sized nameplates permanently attached to the respective equipment.

Small equipment items (i.e., in-line pumps, pot feeders, etc.) shall be identified with brass valve tags, see requirements for valve tags and chains.

Equipment that is controlled by the Building Automation Control System shall be labeled with a 2” x 5” yellow label with black letters:

“CAUTION – THIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER COMPUTER CONTROL AND MAY CYCLE AT ANY TIME.”

Interior equipment nameplates shall be 1/16” thick two-ply acrylic plastic 2-1/2” x 1” size minimum with white letters on a black background. Tag size shall be appropriate for equipment name, letters shall be a minimum of ½” high.

Exterior equipment shall be identified with nameplates suitable for exterior use or shall be engraved aluminum plates .020” thick, minimum size shall be 4” x 1-1/2” plates.

Nameplates shall be attached with corrosion-resistant No. 3 round head or No. 4 sheetmetal screws.





20 10 99 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

Supply, return and exhaust ductwork uninsulated or insulated, exposed or concealed, shall be identified as specified herein, except for exposed ductwork in finished areas.

Markers shall be installed in clear view; installed on both sides of the duct; run parallel to the ductwork; located at not more than twenty-five foot (25') intervals on straight runs at all branch locations; and located on each side of penetrations of the building structure and non-accessible enclosures.

Markers shall be pressure sensitive vinyl tape labeled for service and direction of airflow. Minimum size shall be 2” high x 8” long.

Supply, return, exhaust and outdoor air ductwork labels shall be blue with white letters. Hazardous exhaust air ductwork labels shall be yellow. Outdoor air labels shall have an “air” legend.

20 10 100 CONTROL DEVICES IDENTIFICATION

The materials specified herein Section 20 10 90 shall apply to Division 25 Temperature Control Systems. Additional identification work is specified in Division 25.



20 20 10 - Page 1 ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS

20 20 10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

20 20 11 GENERAL

This Subsection specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of “packaged” mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to, factory installed motors, starters, disconnect switches, control panels and related prewiring of power and control wiring for a single external electrical service connection. All material and equipment shall be provided for the application and service intended.

Specific electrical requirements (e.g. horsepower, electric characteristics, etc.) for mechanical equipment shall be specified within the respective equipment specifications or shall be scheduled on the Plans.

The Contractor shall verify that electrical characteristics of material and equipment furnished for Divisions 20 - 25 equipment are in accordance with the electric service and comply with the specifications and requirements of Division 26 - 25.

Unless otherwise specified as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment, motor control centers, motor starters and disconnect switches and the power wiring from power source to motor starting equipment (including variable frequency drive packages) and wiring from that equipment to the respective motors including final connections shall be performed as Electrical Work of Division 26 - 25.

The field installation of electrical components, not included in Division 26 - 25, that are specified to be provided with the mechanical equipment and are shipped separately shall be the responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the base equipment.

All electrical components and material shall be UL labeled.

Submittals for the applicable electrical equipment shall include the following: identification of the equipment which the electrical material is to serve, application, voltage, phases, full load amperage, wattage and NEMA enclosure. For motors: horsepower, RPM, full load power factor and efficiency, frame size and service factor.

Identification of electrical components of mechanical equipment shall be in accordance with Subsection 20 10 90, “Basic Mechanical Methods - Identification”.

20 20 12 REFERENCES

Electrical material and equipment provided for Divisions 20 - 25 shall meet the applicable requirements of the latest accepted edition of the following codes and standards:

ANSI American National Standards Institute EEI Edison Electrical Institute IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.




REQUIREMENTS

20 20 13 MOTORS

The following are basic minimum requirements for all motors. Additional motors, more detailed and specific requirements may be specified with the respective equipment.

Single-phase motors shall be provided for all motors 1/2 HP or less, except as specified or scheduled otherwise and shall be of the permanent split capacitor (PSC) type.

Polyphase motors shall be provided for all motors 3/4 HP or larger, except as specified or scheduled otherwise with a minimum power factor of .85 at 65% of full load or shall be power factor corrected.

Multi-speed motors shall have dual windings wound to the speeds scheduled or specified.

Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven load(s) with low in rush current.

Motor horsepower sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load shall not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.

Temperature rating: Rated for 40 deg. C environment with maximum temperature rise for continuous duty at full load of 40°C for open dripproof motors, 50°C for splash proof motors, and 55°C for totally enclosed motors (Class B insulation). Motors used with variable frequency drives/inverters shall be NEMA MG1, Part 31 Compliant and have a Class B temperature rise with Class F insulation design to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short rise time pulses produced by inverters.

Starting capability: Frequency of starts as specified by the automatic control system. For manually controlled motors, not less than five (5) evenly time spaced starts per hour.

Service factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.

Shaft Grounding Protection: Any motor used with variable frequency drives/inverters shall be provided with a shaft grounding ring to protect the motor from damaging shaft electrical currents at all motor speeds manufactured by Aegis.

Motor construction:

1. NEMA standard frame sizes, general-purpose open dripproof (unless otherwise specified), continuous duty, Design “B” (unless “C” is required for high starting torque). Motor frame, end bells and conduit box shall be cast iron; stator windings shall be copper. Aluminum is unacceptable for any parts. Provide grounding lug in motor terminal box.

2. Motors located outdoors or otherwise exposed to water, dust, etc. where an open motor would not be suited, shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC).

3. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. Externally accessible inlet/outlet grease fittings. Where motors are enclosed within equipment, extend grease tubing to exterior of the enclosure. Bearings designed to resist thrust loading for drives producing lateral or axial thrust. Fractional horsepower, light duty motors may have sleeve bearings.

4. Overload protection: Built-in thermal overload protection.

5. Noise rating: Motors shall meet IEEE, Standard 85.




REQUIREMENTS

6. Efficiency: Motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency per NEMA Standards Publication MG 1-2003, Table 12-12 and 12-13.

7. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, voltage, characteristics, construction, special features, etc. Nameplates in harsh environments such as for cooling towers, or in pool equipment rooms, etc. shall be suited to the specific application.

Acceptable manufacturers: Baldor, General Electric, Gould, Marathon, Magnetek, Reliance, Siemens, Toshiba, and U.S. motors.

20 20 14 MOTOR CONTROLS

Motor Starters: NEMA 1, general-purpose enclosures with padlock ears, unless specified otherwise. Type, size and duty shall be as specified or as recommended by the motor manufacturer and the requirements of the driven equipment for applicable protection and start-up conditions.

Manual Starters: Pilot light and extra positions for multi-speed motors. Melting alloy type thermal overload relay protection.

Magnetic Starters: Hand-off-Auto selector switches, pilot lights, interlock contacts, switches and other devices as required for control requirements. Trip-free thermal overload relays for each phase. Built-in 120 volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where power service exceeds 240 volts. Externally operated manual reset; under-voltage release of protection.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Square D.

20 20 15 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

Fusible: For 3/4 horsepower and larger. Disconnect switch shall be horsepower rated, heavy duty, spring reinforced fuse clips each phase, quick-make/quick-break mechanism with arc quenchers, dead front line side shield, solderless lugs, silver electroplated current carrying parts, lockable hinged door, capacity and electric characteristics as specified.

Non-fusible: For 1/2 horsepower motor and smaller. Disconnect switch shall be horsepower rated, toggle switch type, quantity of poles and voltage rating as specified.

20 20 16 MULTI-SPEED MOTORS AND CONTROLS

Multi-speed motors, when required, shall be specified under the heading of the respective equipment to be driven.

Motor controls for multi-speed applications shall be specified, also, under the heading of the respective equipment, if said equipment is a “packaged” type unit.

Otherwise, multi-speed motor controls shall be specified in Division 26.

20 20 17 EC MOTORS

A. Electronically commutated motor shall be permanently lubricated with heavy-duty ball bearings. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to the equipment to DC power to operate the motor. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% full speed. Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted on the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.




REQUIREMENTS

20 20 18 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

Motor controls for variable speed drives shall be specified under the heading of the respective equipment, if said equipment is a “packaged” type unit.

Otherwise, variable speed drives shall be specified in Division 26.

20 20 19 CONTROL PANEL

NEMA 1 general-purpose enclosure for indoor application; NEMA 3R weather resistant enclosure for exterior location.

Factory mount panel(s) and internal power and control devices. Pre-wire all devices for the operation of the related equipment so that only one main power connection shall be required in the field.

Provide internal protection for each circuit, maximum 120-volt secondary control transformer(s), terminal strips for wiring terminations, identification of components and wiring diagram inside the cover.



20 20 20 - Page 1 DRIVES AND GUARDS

20 20 20 DRIVES AND GUARDS

20 20 21 GENERAL

This Subsection covers V-belt, sprocket-chain, gear and direct coupled drives.

All drives shall be selected for 150% of specified motor nameplate horsepower.

All drives shall be installed, balanced and aligned in accordance with the respective manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

20 20 22 V-BELT DRIVES

All motors shall be provided with variable pitch pulleys with design RPM at mid-range of adjustment.

V-belts shall be premium quality, endless cord impregnated rubber with trapezoidal cross section, type A, B, C or D, matched set (if more than one), 95% minimum drive efficiency.

The driving motor shall be installed on an adjustable bolt device to provide for belt tension adjustment.

Acceptable manufacturers:

1. V-belt drives: Browning, Eaton, Gates

20 20 23 DIRECT DRIVES

Wherever available, motors and related direct driven equipment shall be mounted on a common base.

20 20 24 GUARDS

All belts, chains, pulleys, shafts, sheaves, sprockets, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and any other rotating parts shall be provided with guards by the Contractor furnishing the base equipment.

Guards shall be designed and arranged in accordance with OSHA requirements.

Guards shall completely enclose the drive, shall be secured to the respective equipment and shall be removable for servicing. Wherever available from the manufacturer, guards shall be provided with the equipment. If not, these shall be field fabricated.

Provide reinforced openings with removable coverplates for access to motor and driven shafts for speed measurement.

Extend tubing for grease fittings inside the guard to accessible locations outside the guard.

20 20 25 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Install, balance and align all drives in accordance with the respective manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.



20 20 20 - Page 2 DRIVES AND GUARDS

The balancing and alignment of drives including pinning, doweling and grouting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment. Any adversities arising from executing the Work shall be resolved/remedied by the Contractor.

Verify all electrical characteristics prior to running electric motor driven equipment. Check motor amperage draw and rotation for proper operation.

END OF SECTION



20 25 00 - Page 1 INSULATION

20 25 00 INSULATION

20 25 01 GENERAL

This Section specifies mechanical insulation of piping, equipment and ductwork.


Provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply to Work for other sections of Divisions 20 - 25 of these Specifications.


Work for this Section of the Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the Codes, Standards, etc. as identified in Division 20 in addition to the following:

1. State and local Air Pollution Codes and Regulations.

2. NFPA 255/UL 723/ASTM E-84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. UL 1479/ASTM E-814 Fire Test of Through-Penetration Firestops.

20 25 03 RELATED SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS

A. Requirements of the following Sections of the Specifications apply to Work for this Section: .1 Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Conditions .2 Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods .3 Division 22 - Plumbing Work .4 Division 23 - HVAC Piping and Equipment .5 Division 24 - Air Distribution


The term “fitting” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall be construed as an elbow, tee or reducer. Unions, flanges and valves shall not be considered as fittings.

The term “cold” shall be defined as the temperature of a surface that may result in the formation of condensation.

The term “accessory” shall include staples, bands, wire, mesh, clips, pins, studs, tape, anchors, corner angles, cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, mastics, finishes, etc.

The term “ASJ” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean a reinforced vapor retarding All Service Jacket.

The term “SSL” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean Self-sealing Lap Joint closure system for longitudinal jacket joints.

The term “supply air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean downstream of a coil.

The term “outdoor air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean ambient air that has not been conditioned.




The term “return air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean conditioned air that is returned from the space.

The term “mixed air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean air streams that are a mixture of “outdoor air” and “return air”.

The term “relief air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean excess return air that is relieved from the building.

The term “exhaust air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean air that is removed due to contaminates, odors, or heat.


Furnish material, labor and services necessary for and incidental to the insulation of the following systems where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary considerations in the related sections of the Specifications (Subsection 20 25 03) to perform the Work completely.

1. Chilled water piping

2. Heating water piping.

3. Condensate drain piping.

4. Waste piping and floor drains located above grade serving condensate drains.

5. Make-up cold water piping.

6. Chilled water equipment and specialties.

7. Reheat coils and return bends of uncased coils, including VAV boxes.

8. Ductwork/sheetmetal systems.

9. Domestic hot, hot recirculating and cold-water piping.

10. Storm water drainage.

Providing appropriate size calcium silicate/cellular glass/pipe shield manufactured inserts to the trade contractor for installation between the pipes and oversized hangers as specified in this section.

Fire wrapping piping system located in occupied spaces or plenum spaces that do not meet flame spread 25 and smoke development 50.

20 25 06 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for approval in accordance with Division 1.

Provide an INSULATION PRODUCT SCHEDULE consisting of the following minimum information:

Material - type of insulation material, jackets, or covers. Manufacturer - manufacturers name, product name, and K-value where applicable. Accessories - tapes, staples, coatings, adhesives including manufacturer's name and product name. Systems - indicate systems where product is used.

Provide an INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE consisting of the following minimum information:

System - indicate which system insulation is installed.




Location - inside, outside, concealed, exposed, etc. Size - indicate size range of pipe, insulation type used. Thickness - indicate insulation thickness in inches.

Provide manufacturer's technical product data of each material and accessory item with engineering support information and recommended installation procedure. Indicate product number, “K” value, thickness and required accessories for each application.

At the completion of the project, submit a letter stating all materials are asbestos free, and meet the specified ASTM E-84 flame/smoke rating of 25/50, and that all piping and duct penetrations are smoke or fire stopped as required by the Code.


Contractor's Qualifications: Contracting company shall be one specializing in insulation application and have a minimum of three (3) years’ experience in this work.



20 25 10 - Page 1 INSULATION MATERIALS

20 25 10 INSULATION MATERIALS

20 25 11 GENERAL

Materials and accessories furnished for this Section of the Specifications shall be standard cataloged products, new, commercially available and suitable for the service specified.

Insulation material and/or accessories containing asbestos are prohibited.

20 25 12 FIRE SAFETY STANDARDS

All insulation material shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings in accordance with NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding the following values as tested by the latest procedures of ASTM E-84: flame spread of 25; smoke developed of 50.

Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and cloths for seams, joints and fittings shall have the same ratings as hereinbefore listed. All products and their respective shipping cartons shall have indications that flame and smoke ratings meet the aforementioned requirements. Any treatment of jackets or facings to impart acceptable flame and smoke safety values shall be permanent; water-soluble applications are prohibited. The Insulation Contractor shall bear responsibility that all products to be used meet the foregoing criteria.

20 25 13 TYPES OF INSULATION MATERIALS

The following types of insulation material are enumerated in the respective INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULE. K values listed are in units of (Btu in/hr ft.2 °F) and are based on specific products and are to be met or exceed. ANSI/ASTM types or class shall not provide relief for any K value specified.

Type CS: Hydrous calcium silicate, molded pipe or block form, asbestos free, ANSI/ASTM C533, Type I, “k” value of 0.41 at 200 degrees F for pipe, “k” value of 0.39 at 200 degrees F for block, density of 15#/cubic foot. Owens-Corning Calcium Silicate or equivalent by Knauf, Manville or Pabco.

Type GF1: Glass fiber, non-combustible, preformed for pipe and tube application, ANSI/ASTM C547, Class 1, “k” value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F. Owens-Corning type ASJ with SSL-II vapor retarder jacket or equivalent by CertainTeed, Knauf, Manville or Schuller.

Type GF2: Glass fiber, non-combustible, rigid board with vapor retarder facing, ANSI/ASTM C612, “k” value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F, density of 3#/cubic foot. Owens-Corning type 703 with ASJ 25 jacket or equivalent by CertainTeed, Knauf, Manville or Schuller.

Type GF3: Glass fiber, flexible blanket, laminated to reinforced kraft vapor retarder facing, ANSI/ASTM C553, Type II, “k” value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F, density of 1#/cubic foot. Owens-Corning type 100 All-Service faced duct wrap or equivalent by CertainTeed, Knauf, Manville or Schuller.

Type F1: Flexible elastomeric foamplastic with smooth exterior surface, preformed for pipe and tube application, ASTM C534, Type I, “k” value of 0.28 at 75 deg. F. Armstrong AP Armaflex pipe insulation, K-Flex LS tube, Aerocel EDPM tube.

Type F2: Flexible elastomeric foamplastic with smooth exterior surface, sheet material, ASTM C534, type II, “k” value of 0.28 at 75 degrees F. Armstrong AP Armaflex sheet material, K-Flex LS sheet, Aerocel EDPM sheet.




Type FG: Rigid foamglass preformed for pipe applications ASTM C552, K value of 0.33 at 75°F with all-purpose vapor retarder jacket. Pittsburgh Corning Foamglass.

Type PI: Polyisocyanurate preformed for pipe applications ASTM C591, aged “k” value of 0.19 at 75 degrees F, density of 2#/cubic foot. Shall be ASTM E84 less than 25/50 rated. Saran 560 vapor barrier.

Type PH: Phenolic preformed for pipe applications ASTM C1126, Type III, grade 1. ASTM E84 less than 25/50 rated, Saran 560 vapor barrier, 0.15@75°F.

20 25 14 TYPES OF PIPING JACKET MATERIALS

.0.016” aluminum or 0.010” stainless steel jackets with moisture barrier shall be cut and fitted to size required. Fold a ½” safety edge on exposed side, roll to diameter required and secure with ½” x 0.020” aluminum or ½” x 0.015” stainless steel bands respectively on 9” centers (4 bands per 3 foot section of jacketing). Provide appropriate seals, and shed water toward low end of pitched piping. Install lap on top quadrant (2 or 10 o'clock position) of outside diameter of insulation and line up bands and seals to present neat and workmanlike appearance. Fitting covers shall be consistent with piping insulation jacketing. Secure in place with SS screws or banding. Seal with approved caulking. Sharp edges shall be turned under or otherwise protected.

Finish piping insulation with factory or field application for respective locations as follows:

Dry, low abuse: Concealed, not exposed to view. (indoor) Mechanical equipment room.

Exposed, finish space. Pipe: ASJ jacket (Mechanical Room - PVC jacket) See color

schedule Fittings: Pre-molded PVC covers.

High abuse area: Exposed vertical risers in all Storage Rooms, Janitor Closets. Exposed, unfinished space.

Pipe: Stainless steel jacket with seam away from abusive force.

Apply to height of 8 feet. Fittings: Formed stainless steel covers.

Outdoors: All Pipe: Smooth aluminum jacket with seam on topside at 2 or 10

o'clock position of horizontal runs. Fittings: Formed aluminum covers.

C. PVC Jacket Color Schedule: Heating Water: Green Chilled Water: Blue




20 25 15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

All of the insulation materials and accessories covered by this specification shall be delivered to the job site and stored in a safe, dry place with appropriate labels and/or other product identification.

The Contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the insulation materials and accessories before, during, and after installation. No insulation material shall be installed that has become damaged in any way. The Contractor shall also use all means necessary to protect work and materials installed by other trades.

If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the Contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An exception may be allowed in cases where the Contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation when fully dried out (either before installation, or afterward following exposure to system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equivalent in all respects to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical assistance and provide the Architect/Engineer with a copy of manufacturer's recommendation for approval.

20 25 16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

The following are acceptable manufacturers for products specified in this section of the specification.

Metal jackets:

1. Childers Products Co., Inc.

2. Insul-Coustics

3. Pabco Surfit Metal Corp.

4. RPR Products, Inc.

PVC covers:

1. Proto Corp.

2. Ceelco Corp.

3. Speedline PVC Corp.

Adhesives and Coatings:

1. Alpha Associates

2. Miracle Adhesives

3. Vimasco Corporation

.4 Fasteners

1. ACS Industries

2. GEMCO

3. Midwest Fasteners



20 25 20 - Page 1 INSULATION MATERIAL

SCHEDULES

20 25 20 INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULES

20 25 21 INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULE I-1

. A. Service: Hot and cold piping thickness insulation material B. Chilled water supply and return piping 5” and smaller 1” F1

6” and larger 1” Type F1 C. Hot water supply and return 1-1/4” and smaller 1-1/2” Type GF1 1-1/2” and larger 2”

L. Domestic water- hot, hot recirc.

1-1/4” and smaller 1-1/2” Type GF1

1-1/2” and larger 1-1/2” Type GF1

M. Domestic water-cold 3/4” Type F1, GF1 (Contractor's option)

N. Storm water from the roof drain to the first 1” Type GF1

floor level below the roof. Thereafter, all horizontal piping only and related elbows to vertical. Insulate drain body with ½” sheet Armaflex.

P. Condensate Drain Lines: ½” Type F1

All - except air handling units in Mechanical Rooms where drain line is 2'-0” or less in total length and located at the Mechanical Room floor.

Q. Waste Piping and Floor Drains: 1/2" Type F1 Piping above grade serving floor drains, hub drains, indirect cabinets, etc., that receive condensate from cooling coils. Insulate piping to where it connects to main waste pipe. S. Fittings (hot and cold): Molded/preformed fittings, secured in place with

twine or tape, seal all “cold” applications prior to installing jacket material.

T. Unions, flanges: Type F1, same thickness as adjacent piping.

Valves: (cold piping) Form external collar, minimum 1” overlap on adjacent insulation. Use adhesive to secure in place and maintain vapor barrier.




SCHEDULES

U. Unions, flanges: No insulation.

(hot piping) V. Valves (hot piping): Insulate valve body only. W. Joints: Lines subject to condensation: seal longitudinal laps of jacket with adhesive and wrap butt joints

between sections with 2” wide tape.




SCHEDULES

20 25 22 INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULE I-2

A. Service: Ductwork, 0 to 250 degrees F. Ductwork to be externally wrapped, no duct to be internally lined. Refer owner ductwork insulation thickness requirements

Location Thickness

B. Unconditioned Spaces and Mechanical Rooms

1. Supply Air, Heated or Cooled Make-up/Ventilation Air 2” 2. VAV box coil return bends, Duct mounted coils 2” 3. Return Air 2” 4. Outdoor Air and Mixed Air 2” 5. Outdoor Air and Mixed Air Plenums, and Filter sections 2” 6. Relief Air N/A 7. Exhaust Air N/A

C. Conditioned Spaces and Return Air Plenums

1. Supply Air, Heated or Cooled Make-up/Ventilation Air 1” 2. VAV box coil return bends, Duct mounted coils 1” 3. Return Air N/A 4. Outdoor Air and Mixed Air 1” 5. Outdoor Air and Mixed Air Plenums, and Filter sections 1” 6. Relief Air N/A 7. Exhaust Air N/A

E. Insulation Material

1. Rectangular ducts Type GF2 2. Round and Oval Ducts Type GF3



20 25 30 - Page 1 INSULATION APPLICATION

20 25 30 INSULATION APPLICATION

20 25 31 INSULATION APPLICATION - GENERAL

Respective piping system, duct system and/or equipment shall be pressure tested, proved tight and accepted, as specified in section for installation of such, before insulation is applied. Sheet metal ductwork joints shall be sealed prior to insulating. Coordination among the respective contractors is essential.

Insulation materials and accessories shall be applied in accordance with respective manufacturer's recommendations and recognized industry practice for the insulation to serve its intended purpose. All surfaces to receive insulation shall be clean, dry, free of oxidation and prepared as required.

The insulation work shall be subject to inspection during the various applications and construction phases. Material, accessories, finishes, methods and workmanship that are not in compliance with these Specifications and/or approved submittals may lead to rejection of the Work and replacement at the Contractor's expense.

Tie-ins to existing systems and all new work shall be insulated to provide a complete and functional system. Finishes shall be compatible wherever possible.

1. When existing insulation thickness is different than the specified thickness herein, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer. It is the intent that the existing piping would be restored to its original condition (thickness and finish) as if new work had not been performed.

Painting of piping for corrosion protection, where specified, shall be performed before insulation is applied.

Painting of piping for color coding, where specified, shall be performed after insulation is applied.

20 25 32 INSULATION APPLICATION - PIPING

Insulate each piping section with single thickness full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run where a fitting is encountered. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

Extend piping insulation without interruptions through walls, floors, and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise specified.

Insulation on unions, flanges, valves, strainers, expansion joints, pump impeller housings and other equipment requiring accessible servicing shall be removable and reusable without damage. Items requiring periodic attention shall have covers and/or casings to contain the insulation.

All “cold” piping systems shall be insulated with type and thickness of material herein specified and shall have a continuous vapor retarder through all fittings, hangers, supports and sleeves.

In cold systems flanges, unions, valves, etc., shall be covered with an oversized pipe insulation section sized to provide the same thickness as on the main piping section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between two insulation sections with low-density blanket insulation being used to fill gaps. Jacketing shall match that used on main piping system. Rough cut ends shall be coated with suitable weather and/or vapor resistant mastic as




required by the system location and service. All valve stems must be sealed with caulking that allows free movement of the stem but provides a seal against moisture incursion.

In hot system flanges, unions, valves, etc., shall be left exposed; insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed to allow bolts to be removed or other required access.

The installation of cold piping systems shall use oversize (outside the thickness of the insulation) pipe hangers.

1. Piping systems 3” and smaller, the Insulation Contractor shall replace temporary wood blocking with insulation of thickness as scheduled in this section of the specification. Metal pipe shields shall be placed between the pipe hanger and the insulation.

2. Piping systems 4” and larger, the Insulation Contractor shall replace the temporary wood blocking with high density pre-formed insulation (i.e. calcium silicate, cellular glass) inserts with suitable characteristics for the weight, temperature and application and insulation protection shields at each hanger. The specified insulation should stop and start at the insert at the hanger locations. The insert shall be wrapped with vapor barrier jacketing. Circumferential joints shall be taped with vapor barrier tape and coated with vapor barrier sealant. B-Line, or equivalent, figure B-3380 through B-3384, 360 deg. calcium silicate insert/shields and figure B-3153 protection shields may be used or equivalent may be field fabricated per details submitted for approval.

3. If in the event pipe hangers are not oversized, this Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Contractor(s) who provided and/or installed hangers. Hangers shall be corrected before pipe is insulated.

4. Where size on size hangers have been approved by the Engineer in writing for use in special situations, the insulator shall insulate the hanger and hanger rod with ½” Type F insulation. Pipe insulation shall terminate at each side of the hanger and have vapor barrier end joint butt strips. Hanger insulation shall overlap pipe insulation a minimum of 4” on each side of the hanger and secured to the pipe insulation with contact adhesive. Hanger rods shall be insulated for a minimum of 12” secured to the rod with contact adhesive and the end sealed with a bead of caulk.

5. The Contractor shall adjust hangers after the insulation and pipe shields have been installed to provide an evenly supported piping system. No hanger shall bear the entire weight or not carry any weight of piping system.

Special requirements for fiberglass pipe insulation:

1. Fiberglass pipe insulation, All Service Jacket/Self Sealing Lap (ASJ w/SSL) type, shall be installed with laps positioned to shed water, position at either 10 o’clock or 2 o’clock and shall not be visible to view. End joint butt strips shall be installed on all piping with ½” adhesive to adhesive overlap.

2. For piping systems using fiberglass insulation, the fittings shall be insulated with: double thickness molded fiberglass fittings, or preformed cellular glass fittings secured with twine or wire; or with flexible elastomeric foamplastic; at the Contractor’s option. The pre-molded PVC fitting covers shall be installed over the fiberglass inserts and secured with SS tacks. Victaulic fittings or couplings shall be insulated with sheet elastomeric foam plastic insulation formed to the fitting and formed “collars” over all couplings encountered.

3. For piping systems using fiberglass insulation, butt joints in hot piping shall be made with 2” wide vapor barrier tape over butt joints. Butt joints in cold piping shall be made with a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 2” vapor barrier tape. All pipe insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed.

4. On “cold” applications only, the following additional requirements shall apply: the premolded fittings shall be sealed with an approved vapor barrier retardant prior to installing the jacket materials. Premolded PVC fitting covers shall then be installed over




the premolded inserts, all joints shall be sealed with vapor barrier cement and 2” vapor barrier tape on lap joints. Premolded stainless steel or aluminum fitting covers shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions and a bead of clear silicon caulk applied to all joints. Straight lengths of insulation abutting all fittings shall have both ends sealed with vapor barrier cement to prevent “wicking” or moisture migration. At a maximum of twenty-one foot (21') intervals, joining ends of the butt joints shall be sealed with vapor barrier cement prior to butting together to prevent “wicking” or moisture migration.

For piping systems using elastomeric foamplastic insulation, joints and seams shall be sealed with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive. Fittings shall be insulated from segments fabricated from pipe insulation or sheet material, secured and sealed with contact adhesive. Termination points and ends shall be sealed to the pipe to prevent backflow of condensation on the inside of the insulation. Any piping outdoors or otherwise exposed to UV or ozone provide two (2) coats of WB Armaflex or Rubatex 374 finish.

20 25 33 INSULATION APPLICATION - EQUIPMENT

Manufactured equipment (i.e. air handling equipment, terminal units, air device plenums, etc.) requiring insulation shall be specified in the respective equipment specifications to be factory insulated with internally applied liner or double wall casing.

20 25 34 INSULATION APPLICATION - DUCTWORK

Ductwork systems shall be insulated in accordance with the insulation schedules. Insulate each duct section with single thickness full length pieces. Do not use scraps abutting each other.

Extend insulation without interruptions through walls, floors, and similar penetration, except where otherwise specified.

“Cold” duct systems shall have insulation with a continuous vapor retarder through all fittings, hangers, supports, air devices, fire dampers, duct mounted coils, dampers, and other devices in the ductwork system, etc.

In “cold” duct systems, using rigid board or sheet elastomeric foam insulation, support angles, stiffener angles, ductmate flanges, etc. they shall be covered with an oversized insulation strip sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the duct. Provide a minimum of 2” of overlap on each side of the obstruction.

Board insulation shall be properly cut and dry fitted to the surface to be insulated. Edges shall be neat and clean cut. No intermediate cut pieces shall be allowed on the bottom and sides of the ductwork. Insulation board shall be secured in place using mechanical fasteners such as welded pins or speed clips. Locate not less than 3” from each edge or corner and approximately 12” on centers on all sides. There shall be a minimum of two (2) rows of pins on the bottom of the duct and one (1) on the sides. Additional pins may be needed on the bottom to prevent sagging. All seams, joints, penetrations and breaks in the vapor retarder jacket shall be sealed with pressure sensitive tape matching insulation facing. Edges shall be provided with 28 ga. 1” x 1” aluminum corner beading properly secured and shall have the same facing material as the insulation board.

Flexible duct wrap insulation shall be cut properly and fitted to “stretchout” dimensions and a 2” piece of insulation removed from the facing at the end of the piece to form an overlapping staple and tape flap. Insulation shall be installed with facing outside so tape flap overlaps facing at the other end. Insulation shall be butted tightly. Seams shall be stapled on 6” centers with outward clinching staples. Adjacent sections of duct wrap insulation shall be butted tightly with the 2” tape flap overlapping and stapled. For horizontal oval ducts over 30” wide, duct wrap insulation shall be secured additionally to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners such as pins




and speed clip washers spaced on 18” centers to prevent sagging. All seams, joints, tears, punctures and other penetrations in the vapor retarder jacket shall be sealed with FRK backing pressure sensitive tape.

Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing insulation.

Where a duct run changes from interior lining to exterior application (or vice versa), there shall be a 6” overlap of insulation.

In "cold" duct system with internal duct insulation, with 1 1/2 " thickness flexible duct wrap, insulate air devices, fire dampers, duct mounted coils, dampers, and other devices in the ductwork system that are not internally insulated.

END OF SECTION.

071580.000

TreanorHL, P.A. UM Projects # CP150752, CP150753 & CP150754


21 00 00 - Page 1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

21 00 00 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

21 00 01 GENERAL

This section specifies a hydraulically calculated fire protection system designed and installed by the Contractor as described on the drawings and hereinafter.

It is the intent that the drawings and specifications shall describe and provide for a working installation complete in every detail and all items necessary for such complete installation shall be furnished whether specifically mentioned or not.


Provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply to Work for other sections of Divisions 20 - 29 of these Specifications.


Work for this Section of the Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the Codes, Standards, etc. as identified in Division 20 in addition to the following:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13, 2010 and 2013 (whichever is more stringent)

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 14, 2010 and 2013 (whichever is more stringent)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 20, 2013

4. The Local Authority having jurisdiction.

21 00 03 REFERENCES, RELATED SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS

Requirements of the following Sections of the Specifications apply to Work for this Section:

Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Conditions.

Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods


The term “layout” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean drawings prepared by the Contractor showing where all piping and heads are located. These drawings should include pipe elevations, need not include pipe sizes and should not include hydraulic calculations.

The term “Authority Having Jurisdiction” or “AHJ” where used in this Section of the Specification shall mean the organization, office, or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation, or a procedure.

The term “rhythm” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean spaced in a manner which would place the heads at the same location with respect to lights or diffusers (i.e., for a row of lights spaced at 12' centers heads shall also be on 12' centers so that the heads will remain the same number of ceiling tiles or distance away from the lights; where there



21 00 00 - Page 2 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

is an odd number of tiles between lights or diffusers, it is also preferable to have heads located at the tile centered between them).

The term “working drawings” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean drawing of the quality and containing all information as which would be required for approval by local official and for field construction.


Furnish material, labor and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of the following systems where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary work in the related sections of the Specifications (Subsection 21 00 03 to perform the Work completely.

Furnish and install a complete hydraulically engineered extension of the building fire protection system including the relocation of existing heads on existing branch lines.

Verify actual water supply with a test, preferably witnessed or performed by the local fire official.

Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of other trades, and with the architectural and structural drawings.

21 00 06 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall prepare submittals for approval in accordance with Division 1.


The Contractor preparing the drawings and calculations shall be NICET Level 3 certified or a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Missouri, whichever is required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

All equipment shall be U.L. Listed or F.M. approved for use in fire protection systems.

21 00 08 CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENTS

Reference Section 20 00 48.

Where NFPA maintenance information is utilized, it shall be edited to contain only information that is relevant to this project.



21 00 10 - Page 1 DESIGN

21 00 10 DESIGN

21 00 11 WATER SUPPLY

The water supply shall be a connection to the (City, private, storage tank, etc.) water supply.

A new flow test witnessed by the Fire Marshal shall be conducted.

This information is provided for general information only.

In sprinkler system that has fire pumps to meet standpipe requirements the sprinkler calculations shall not include the use of the fire pump. They shall be based upon the local water supply flowing through the bypass around the fire pump.

Design water pressure requirements shall include a minimum of 10-psi safety factor. Where Authority having jurisdiction requires a higher safety factory it shall be used.

The point of this Contractor's work shall start where determined by the “General Contractor” and local trade practices.

21 00 12 LAYOUT - GENERAL TO ALL SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

The “layout” shall be submitted to the Architect prior to performing hydraulic calculation, sizing pipes or seeking approvals from the authority having jurisdiction.

The Architect/Engineer will review “layout” for aesthetics, and pipe routings for consistency with the construction documents.

Minimum head spacing shall be as per NFPA-13., F.M., additional heads may be required by the Architect/Engineer to create spacing that works with the reflected ceiling plans. Contractor shall layout any areas not shown on the plans with symmetry and “rhythm” in mind.

Heads shall be on return bends and centered ± 1” for 2' x 2' ceiling tiles, or on quarter points ± 1” for 4' x 2' ceiling tiles.

Contractor shall not scale the drawing, refer to architectural drawings for dimensions. Where the room dimension is at the maximum size listed for the sprinkler heads, install an additional row of sprinklers.

Contractor shall locate heads in the field from the final wall locations. It shall be brought to the Architect’s/Engineer’s attention where the center of tile location exceeds the maximum distance of the sprinkler. Additional heads shall be added and the layout modified as directed by the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

All sets and rises shall be located above ceilings of adjacent spaces of rooms without ceilings as opposed to making the sets and risers in the exposed spaces.

Inspector test connections and auxiliary drains shall be piped to spaces not occupied by building occupants, i.e., Mechanical Rooms, Storage Rooms, Janitor's Closets, etc.




21 00 13 APPROVALS

Submittal drawings shall show lights, ducts, and pipes indicating all necessary rises and drops in sprinkler piping required for routing. Drawings shall be of a minimum of the same scale as the contract documents. A ¼” scale drawing of the service entrance and an elevation of the service entrance shall be required. A sprinkler riser diagram showing all control valves, test connections, supervisory switches, and drains shall be required.

The “layout” submittals shall contain at least two (2) copies of reproducible sepias of piping layout. Equipment cut sheets shall also be provided at this time.

Any pipe sizing or hydraulic calculations performed prior to the Contractor receiving the “layout” submittal with the 'approved stamp' of the Engineer shall be at the Contractor's own risk. Any design changes resulting in resizing pipe and/or revising hydraulic calculations will be done at no cost to the Owner.

The “working drawing” submittals shall contain at least two (2) copies of reproducible sepias of piping layout and at least two (2) copies of hydraulic calculations. Calculations shall include peaking information for each area calculated. The hydraulic calculation used for the system design shall be clearly identified from all other hydraulic calculations and should show the safety factor the designed system has relevant to the available water test pressure.

Hydraulic calculations shall include: actual pipe internal diameters and coefficients of materials approved in the “layout” submittal; design density; remote area size; and area per sprinkler.

The Contractor shall not pursue any approvals or interpretations of the design documents except through the office of the Architect/Engineer.

All work shall meet the requirements of the Owner, authority having jurisdiction, Owner's insurance underwriter, Architect and Engineer. These requirements may be greater than required by NFPA. Work shall not start prior to the Contractor receiving the “working drawing” shop drawings with the 'stamp' of the Engineer and approval from the authority having jurisdiction.

21 00 14 TESTING

Preliminary testing witnessed by the Architect/Engineer shall be conducted to assure proper operation before the final test is scheduled. Prior to this testing, pipes shall be flushed, hydrostatically tested, and all valves and devices shall be operated. All requirements of “System Acceptance” of NFPA 13 shall be met in full.

The sprinkler system shall be final Acceptance tested in the presence of the Owner's Representative and the governing agencies having jurisdiction for approval.

21 00 15 ACCEPTANCE

.Acceptance test performed as described above.

Contractor shall fill out completely and sign Contractor's Material and Test Certificate provided in NFPA-13 and submit to Engineer for approval and thus system acceptance.

Spurious Alarms

1. If the Owner experiences an unacceptable number of spurious or unexplained false alarms during the installation and guarantee periods, the Contractor shall be responsible




for providing the necessary labor, material and technical expertise to correct the problem to the satisfaction of the Owner.

2. Any spurious alarms associated with waterflow devices or valve supervisory switches, range hood and duct fire suppression system monitoring devices, or monitoring of special suppression systems are considered unacceptable.

3. The Contractor shall coordinate with the fire alarm contractor to resolve spurious or unexplained false alarms.

D. Keys and Special Tools

1. The Contractor shall supply the Owner with three complete sets of any special tools or keys necessary for normal operation and maintenance of the system. Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical.

21 00 16 SPACE CLASSIFICATION

The most stringent of NFPA-13, local practices, or the following criteria shall be used in the sprinkler system design and hydraulic calculations.

1) Light Hazard: Offices Toilet Rooms Lobby/Commons Area Corridors Hospitals

2) Ordinary Hazard, Group 1:

Mechanical Rooms Janitor's Closet

3) Ordinary Hazard, Group 2:

Storage

B. The hazard protection level shall be increased as required for areas with hazardous

materials, flammable and combustible liquids, or storage that requires additional protection per NFPA 13. The sprinkler design criteria for spaces with hazardous materials and/or flammable and combustible liquids shall be in accordance with NFPA 30 and the requirements for Extra Hazard occupancies of NFPA 13.

C. Reduction in design area shall be permitted for quick response sprinklers in accordance with

NFPA 13.



21 00 20 - Page 1 SERVICE ENTRANCE

21 00 20 SERVICE ENTRANCE

21 00 21 WATER FLOW SWITCH

Water flow detectors shall be UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, 250 psig rated, designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Install on the sprinkler system as indicated and where required. Detectors shall be mounted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. They shall be designed to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 gpm. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 seconds. Switches shall be form C contacts at 10A/120V or 2A/24VDC suitable for operation on 120-volt A.C. or 24-volt D.C. Detectors shall be of dust tight construction. Detector switch enclosures shall be tamper-proof. Water flow switch shall be Potter-Roemer model VSR-F or equivalent.

The detector shall be furnished, installed under this Section and wired complete under Division 26.

21 00 22 VALVES

All valves shall be UL listed or F.M. approved and rated for 250 psi and listed for use in fire protection systems.

Zone valves shall be, flanged or groove-end, UL 262 OS&Y gate valve or UL 1091 butterfly valve with manual gear operator, position indicator, and integral tamper switch.

Drain valves shall be MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 250 minimum, threaded or groove-end rising stem globe valve.

Check valves shall be UL 312 flanged or groove-end swing check. Where used on fire department connections, valve shall have integral ball drip.

Flow test and drain valve shall be a ball valve with sight glass. Valves shall be Guardian #9215 or equivalent.

21 00 23 GAUGES

Furnish and install pressure gauges at locations shown on the plans and where required for flow testing. Gauges shall be UL 393 listed for use in sprinkler systems, ¼ NPT or larger, 3-½ inch face, with an upper limit at least twice the normal working pressure. Each gauge shall have a shutoff valve and be arranged for draining without disturbing the gauge.

21 00 24 PIPING MATERIAL AND FITTING SCHEDULE

A. Size: 2-1/2” and larger above grade.

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel.

2. Fittings: Butt-welded, groove-end, forged steel flanged. 3. Joints: Butt welded, groove-end couplings, flanged. 4. Tests: Hydrostatically at not less than 200 psi for two (2) hours per NFPA 13,

Section 8-2.2.

B. Size: 2” and smaller above grade.



21 00 20 - Page 2 SERVICE ENTRANCE

1. Pipe: Schedule 40. 2. Fitting: Cast iron. 3. Joints: Screwed, groove-end. 4. Tests: Hydrostatically at not less than 200 psi for two (2) hours per NFPA 13,

Section 8-2.2.

D. The following types of fittings are prohibited: plain end couplings and fittings, saddle tee, Victaulic flange rings, and Victaulic reducing couplings.

E. Pipe velocities shall not exceed 14 feet per second in any section of the piping system.



21 00 30 - Page 1 WET PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEM

21 00 30 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

21 00 31 SPRINKLER HEADS

All sprinkler heads are to be quick response liquid in glass bulb type, with a minimum of ½ inch orifice, ½ inch NPT, and a K factor of 5.65. Sprinklers have an orifice larger than ½ inch shall be ¾” NPT.

In finished spaces with ceilings, concealed sprinklers with an adjustable white coverplate shall be used. Heads shall be equivalent to the Viking model Horizon Mirage, Star model Stealth S110, Central model Royal Flush Concealed, or Reliable model G4QR.

In unfinished spaces or in concealed locations, upright and pendent sprinkler heads with a natural bronze finish shall be used. Heads shall be equivalent to the Viking Microfast Model M, Reliable model F1FR, or Star model SG.

In finished spaces without ceilings the heads shall be the same as above with the addition of a white factory finish.

Sidewall sprinklers where utilized in Unobstructed Construction shall be horizontal recessed type with a white factory finish. Heads shall be equivalent to Viking Microfast model M, Reliable HSW-1, or Star Galaxy model.

Sprinklers located in locations where they are likely to be damaged shall be furnished with wire guards.

Temperature range and response time shall be suitable for the location and the expected heat release. Within a space all sprinklers should be the same Temperature Range and Response Time to avoid “skipping”.

21 00 32 AREAS SUBJECT TO FREEZING

At locations which are subject to freezing and where permitted by the Authority having jurisdiction provide “anti-freeze” fill loop with all required specialties including, but not limited to, fill cup, test valves, drain valve, and backflow preventer. At locations which the above is not permitted provide a dry pipe system.

21 00 33 PIPING MATERIAL and FITTING SCHEDULE A. Size: 2-1/2” and larger above grade.

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel. 2. Fittings: Butt-welded, groove-end, forged steel flanged. 3. Joints: Butt welded, groove-end couplings, flanged. 4. Tests: Hydrostatically at not less than 200 psi for two (2) hours per NFPA 13, Section

8-2.2.

B. Size: 2” and smaller above grade. 1. Pipe: Schedule 40.



21 00 30 - Page 2 WET PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEM

2. Fitting: Cast iron. 3. Joints: Screwed, groove-end. 4. Tests: Hydrostatically at not less than 200 psi for two (2) hours per NFPA 13, Section 8-

2.2. C. The following types of fittings are prohibited: plain end couplings and fittings, saddle tee,

Victaulic flange rings, and Victaulic reducing couplings. D. Pipe velocities shall not exceed 14 feet per second in any section of the piping system.



21 00 40 - Page 1 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER

SYSTEM

21 00 40 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM

21 00 41 GENERAL

A pre-action system shall be provided. The method of release of the deluge valve priming water pressure shall be released by an activation of the supplemental detection system only. The pre-action system riser shall be of a listed and approved assembly. The system riser shall be equipped with a rubber seated check valve downstream of the deluge valve and prior to the supervisory air connection. The pre-action system shall be provided with all necessary appurtenances to complete the system. The pre-action system shall be of the Single Interlock Release type.

21 00 42 SYSTEM DEVICES

Water Control Valve: The pre-action systems shall utilize a straight-through pattern type of deluge valve. The inlet and outlet connections of deluge valve can be flanged by flanged, flanged by grooved or grooved by grooved, respectively. The deluge valve shall be capable of installation in the vertical or horizontal position. The deluge valve shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved. The deluge valve shall have a working pressure of 250 PSI. The valve trim shall be compatible and shall be installed following the manufacturer’s specifications. The deluge valve to be Viking Model E-1 or F-1 or approved equivalent by Grinnell, Reliable, Star.

Water Control Valve Trim: The deluge valve trim shall incorporate a prime shut-off valve (PSOV) of the same manufacturer as the deluge valve, to provide a hydraulic means to positively close the supply of priming water to the priming chamber. All the deluge valve trim piping and devices shall be listed for use on a deluge system. The deluge valve trim shall be rated for 250 PSI working pressure. The deluge valve trim shall be galvanized. The deluge valve trim shall be equipped with an emergency manual release enclosed in a steel box with appropriate labeling. The deluge valve trim shall be equipped with alarm connections for the electrical or mechanical activation of water flow alarms. The Deluge Valve Trim shall be compatible with the above specified water control deluge valve.

Solenoid Valve: The deluge valve priming water release device shall be an electrically operated solenoid valve when electric releases are used as the supplemental detection system. The solenoid valve shall be constructed of a ½" brass body with a stainless steel core tube, core, plugnut and springs. The solenoid valve shall have a maximum working pressure of 250 PSI. The solenoid valve shall be UL Listed for its intended use. The Solenoid Valve shall be listed for use with the above specified water control deluge valve.

System Control Valve: The pre-action system control valve shall be a listed indicating type valve. The control valve shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved for fire protection installations. The system control valve shall be rated for normal system pressure but in no case less than 175 PSI.

Sprinklers: Sprinklers shall be of the types indicated in the contract documents. Sprinkler selection shall be such to facilitate complete system drainage if charged. Water sitting in sprinkler drops is not permissible.

System Check Valve: Check valves shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved for use on fire protection systems. The sprinkler riser check valves shall be manufactured with supply side and system side gauge connections and a main drain outlet in conformance with N.F.P.A.




SYSTEM

13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems. The check valves shall be constructed of a ductile iron body with a brass seat and a rubber faced clapper assembly hinged to a removable access cover. The check valves shall be equipped with a removable access cover for periodic inspection as required in N.F.P.A. 25, Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. The check valves shall have a working water pressure of 250 PSI. The Check Valve shall be of the same manufacturer as the above specified deluge valve. The Check Valve to be Viking Model F-1 Easy Riser Check Valve or approved equal.

A supervisory air pressure shall be maintained. A low air pressure alarm will activate by way of a pressure supervisory alarm pressure switch. The low air pressure alarm switch shall be compatible with system devices. The low air pressure alarm switch enclosure shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved for the application in which it is used. The low air pressure alarm switch shall have the ability to be wired for Class A or Class B service. The low air pressure alarm switch shall be equipped with two SPDT (single-pole double-throw) snap action switches. The Low Air Pressure Supervisory Switch shall be Viking, part number 09472 or 09473 or approved equal.

Alarm Pressure Switch: Water flow will activate an alarm by way of an alarm pressure switch. The alarm pressure switch shall be compatible with the system devices. The alarm pressure enclosure shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved. The alarm pressure switch shall have the ability to be wired for Class A or Class B service. The Alarm Pressure Switch shall be Viking, part number 09470 or 09471 or approved equal.

Air Maintenance Device: Air supplies provided for sprinkler systems shall be equipped with an automatic air pressure maintenance device. The air maintenance device shall be equipped with a ¼" air supply bypass with a field adjustable air pressure regulator with a built in ball check valve to eliminate air loss when system is in service. The air maintenance device shall have a factory setting of 40 PSI. Air Maintenance Device to be Viking Model D-2 or approved equal.

1. Air maintenance device shall be installed with a strainer and pressure regulator with isolation valves on each side.

Control: The building fire alarm system shall be configured to control the single interlocked pre-action fire protection system providing all functionality as required by U.L., Factory Mutual, and the local authority having jurisdiction. Supplemental detection devices shall be provided and installed as indicated in the contract documents.

21 00 43 AIR COMPRESSOR

Furnish and install and appropriately sized riser mounted air compressor for the system volume. Contractor shall confirm necessary approval requirements with owner

For U.L. 2125 Approved Systems: Sprinkler systems requiring an air supply with a capacity of 150 gallons or less shall be equipped with a riser mounted, electric motor-driven, air-cooled, single-stage, oil-less compressor. Air compressor motor shall be ¼ horsepower in size and produce 1.5 SCFM at 50 PSI. The field adjustable pressure range of air compressor shall be 14-60 PSI. Air compressor discharge outlet shall be equipped with a pressure relief valve with a factory setting of 65 PSI. Air compressor discharge piping will include a ¼" check valve to prevent system air pressure loss. Maintenance air compressor shall be UL 2125 approved. Air Compressor Model F-1 or approved equal shall be used.




SYSTEM

All electrical power requirements for the air compressor shall be the responsibility of this section of the specification (refer to Division 26 drawings for riser diagrams and panel schedules for locations of obtaining power). As soon as the Contractor knows what the power requirements are for the air compressor and where its installed location will be, the Contractor shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing his intentions for obtaining power.

END OF SECTION 071580.000



22 00 00 - Page 1 PLUMBING WORK

22 00 00 PLUMBING WORK

22 00 01 GENERAL

The Plans, the general provisions of the Contract including the General, Supplementary and/or Special Conditions and specification sections of Division 1 shall apply to Work of Divisions 22 of the Specifications.

Provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply to Work for other sections of Divisions 22 of these Specifications.

Each plumbing fixture, accessory, equipment item and specialty shall be installed in accordance with the respective manufacturer's recommendations.

Plumbing fixtures, equipment and specialties shall be protected against damage in the period between installation and acceptance. Any item damaged shall be removed, repaired and/or replaced at no additional compensation.

All operable devices and features of plumbing fixtures, accessories, equipment and specialties provided for in the Scope of Work of this Section shall be operated and proved to function satisfactorily for a period of eight (8) hours. Adjust, balance, lubricate as required, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of each device.

The plumbing system shall comply with the 2011 Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act. Components shall be “lead free” equivalent of model number specified regardless if manufacturer’s prefix and suffix have been included.


Work for this Section of the Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the Codes, Standards, etc. as identified in Division 20.

22 00 03 RELATED SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS

The following sections of the Specifications apply to Work under this Section:

1. Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Conditions and Basic Mechanical Material and Methods

2. Division 25 - Temperature Control (for monitoring domestic water temperature)


(none) 22 00 05 WORK INCLUDED

Furnish material, labor and services necessary for and incidental to providing the following Plumbing Work where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary work in the related sections of the Specifications (Subsection 20 00 43) to perform the Work completely.

1. Sanitary waste system, including but not limited to, sanitary piping, vent piping, acid waste, acid vent piping, plumbing fixtures, floor drains, and cleanouts.

2. Storm water drainage system, including but not limited to, storm water piping, roof drains, overflow drains, area drains, and cleanouts.



22 00 00 - Page 2 PLUMBING WORK

3. Potable domestic water system, including but not limited to, cold water piping, hot water piping, hot water return piping, and connection to all plumbing fixtures, equipment or specialties.

4. Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of other trades, and with the architectural and structural drawings.

5. Draining, filling, and venting of all modified systems as required for the above work. This includes scheduling shutdowns with the Owner. (Refer to Section 20 10 70).

6. Provide sufficient labor and resources required for the testing and balancing (Refer to Section 20 10 80) and for the commissioning process (Refer to Section 152300).

7. Smoke stopping of all penetrations of pipes and firestopping of the same through fire rated partitions as shown on the architectural drawings including, but not limited to stairways, shafts, corridors, floors, roofs, and required exits. (Refer to Section 20 10 20).

8. Cleaning and pressure testing equipment, piping, and accessories installed under this section of the specification. (Refer to Section 20 10 50).

9. All seismic restraints for the above work. (Refer to Section 20 10 40).

10. Installing accessories specified under other sections of the specification referenced in subsection 20 00 05.

22 00 06 SUBMITTALS (SEE SUBSECTION 20 00 43)

The Contractor shall submit the following shop drawings for approval in accordance with Subsection 20 00 43 - Submittals.

1. Piping materials and valves as specified in Piping Material Schedule(s) in subsection 22 20 00.

2. All specified drains and overflows in subsection 22 30 00.

3. All specified plumbing fixtures in subsection 22 40 00.

4. All specified plumbing equipment in subsection 22 60 00.

5. All specified plumbing specialties in subsection 22 80 00.

6. .All general items specified under Division 20 utilized in the installation of work required by this section of the specification.

Provide manufacturer's technical product data of each material and accessory item with engineering support information and recommended installation procedure. Data shall be specific to product specified and clearly identified on all data sheets, which contains multiple models or sizes.


Contractor shall submit coordination drawings to the Engineer for review prior to any fabrication or installation. (Refer to Section 20 10 50).


Where lines installed under this section of the specification tie-in to existing lines Contractor shall verify all existing lines, their elevations and directions of flow before running any new lines.

1. Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery if the new line cannot tie-in to the existing line due to location, elevation, or direction of flow.



22 20 00 - Page 1 PLUMBING PIPING

SYSTEMS

22 20 00 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS

General

1. Furnish and install the piping systems shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified in the respective PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE. Include all necessary considerations in the related sections of the Specifications (subsection 22 00 05) to provide for complete systems.

.All drainage lines shall be flushed clean at the completion of the Work. Rod out any obstructions encountered.

All domestic water lines shall be flushed clean at the completion of the Work. Refer to Section 20 10 56 – Cleaning of Piping Systems.

Pressure test each respective piping system for tightness to the test pressure indicated without loss. Repair any leaks and retest, as required. If test pressure is not indicated, hydrostatically test to 1.5 times the system operating pressure.

The Plans indicate the approximate location and arrangement of roughing-in for waste, vent and domestic water piping to serve the respective plumbing fixture, equipment and specialties. Final locations and arrangements shall be determined from approved shop drawings of the respective item.

Provide approved backflow preventers in all branch lines in the domestic water system for connections to non-domestic applications.

Main vents shall be the same size as waste lines and shall extend 12” minimum above the roof. Minimum vent thru the roof (VTR) shall be 3” size.

Install all piping with pitch to vent or drain. Provide drain valves at low points and air vents at high points. Drain valves and air vents shall be ¾” bronze, 2 piece body ball valves with ¾” hose end adapter, cap, and chain. In ½” through 2” pipe, contractor may use Webstone model T-drain.

The plumbing system shall comply with the 2011 Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

22 20 02 PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE P-1

Service: Storm water drainage (ST), above grade. Sanitary waste (SAN) and Vent (V), above grade. Piping within the building perimeter.

Design: Pressure: gravity vented. Temperature: 140 degrees F.

Pipe: Cast iron soil pipe, no-hub.

Fittings: Cast iron, no-hub.

Joints: No-hub stainless steel coupling assembly, with neoprene rubber gasket.

Test: Pressure test at not less than 15 feet static head of water for two (2) hours minimum.




SYSTEMS


Service: Storm water drainage (ST), above grade. Sanitary waste (SAN) and Vent (V), above grade. Piping within the building perimeter.

Design: Pressure: gravity vented. Temperature: 140 degrees F.

Pipe: Cast iron soil pipe, no-hub.

Fittings: Cast iron, no-hub.

Joints: No-hub stainless steel coupling assembly, with neoprene rubber gasket.

Flashing: Provide 6 #/SF sheet lead flashing consistent with the type of roof construction x 12” high for all vents-thru-roof (VTR), except for membrane type roofing only which flashing shall be provided by roofing contractor. Minimum VTR shall be 3” size (see also 20 10 26).

Test: Pressure test at not less than 15 feet static head of water for two (2) hours minimum.


A. Service: Domestic water, above grade. Includes cold water (CW), hot water (HW), hot water recirculating (HWR) and softened water (SW).

Sump pump discharge piping. B. Design: Pressure: 100 psig.

Temperature: 180 degrees F. max. for hot water only. C. Pipe: Copper, hard drawn, seamless, type L.

1. Fittings: Wrought copper, solder ends. 2. Dielectric Isolation union/union flanges between Fittings: water piping and non-

copper connections and at all equipment connections. D. Flanges: Cast bronze, 125 psi. E. Joints:

All 95/5 Solder

F. Valves: All valves shall be lead free.

1. Shut-off/Service:

3” and smaller Ball valve, bronze body, two piece, full port, stainless steel ball and trim. 4” and larger Gate valve, Class 125 cast iron body, bolted bonnet, non-rising stem, resilient wedge.




SYSTEMS

2. Balancing/Throttling:

3” and smaller “Circuit Setter” 3. Check Valve:

3” and smaller Class 125 bronze, horizontal swing, Y-pattern, regrinding type, renewable seat and disc, solder ends. 4” and larger Class 125-iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat and disc, bronze mounted, flanged ends.

4. Hose End Interior: ¾” hose thread outlet x copper sweat inlet with integral

Valve: vacuum breaker. Nibco figure 63-VB. 5. Hose End Interior: ¾” hose thread outlet x copper sweat inlet with integral

Valve: vacuum breaker. Nibco figure 63-VB.

6. Test: Hydrostatically pressure test at 150 psi for four (4) hours

minimum.



22 30 00 - Page 1 DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS

22 30 00 DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS

General

1. Furnish and install the following drains and cleanouts where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Drains and cleanouts shall have all options, body material, top size, top style, top material, and accessories as specified whether or not listed as a prefix, suffix, or catalog number.

Drain and cleanout outlets shall be compatible with respective piping material and size. Outlets below grade shall be push type. Outlets above grade may be no-hub or push type at the Contractor’s option. Tops shall be compatible with the flooring system.

Provide deep seal P-traps for all floor drains.

Provide full size cleanouts per code referenced in Division 20 and up to 4” size above the lowest floor line in all drainage risers, and where total of the fittings exceed 120 degrees and at changes in direction greater than 60 degrees in horizontal drainage lines, and at intervals of not greater than fifty (50) feet in straight piping runs 4” diameter and smaller, and one hundred (100) feet for piping over 4” diameter.

Do not install cleanouts in electrical equipment rooms. Extend the cleanout to outside the room limits.

Where cleanout is located in open ground, extend the cleanout to finished grade elevation and install a 16” x 16” x 8” deep concrete pad at grade to secure the cleanout.

Submit with products, a room by room schedule indicating floor drains and cleanouts to be used including top size, shape, floor finish material, and setting height with respect to concrete slabs. Any drain body set prior to approval shall be performed with block-outs to allow correct tops and finished heights to be adjusted.

22 30 01 FLOOR DRAINS

Floor Drain: toilet room (FD-A):

Cast iron body with flashing flange, integral reversible clamping collar, seepage openings, 6” x 6” square adjustable satin nickel bronze, strainer top with vandal proof fasteners and be 3” outlet. Wade W-1103-G6-1-176, Zurn ZN-415-6S-VP, J.R. Smith 2000-B06NB-U-L, MIFAB F1100C-S6-1, or approved equivalent.

Floor Drain: mechanical equipment room (FD-B):

Cast iron body with flashing flange, integral reversible clamping collar, seepage openings, 7” cast iron loose set tractor strainer and 3” outlet. Wade W-1103-TS7, Zurn Z-415-7N, J.R. Smith 2000-D-CI, MIFAB F1100C-N-1, or approved equivalent.

22 30 02 SHOWER DRAINS:

Shower Drain (SD-A):

Cast iron, double drainage flange spigot outlet, adjustable strainer heads, weep holes. Provide 6” x 6” satin nickel bronze adjustable strainer with vandalproof screws for finished tile floor application. Wade Series 1100-G6-1-176, Zurn ZN-415-6S-VP, J.R. Smith 2000-B06NB-U-L, MIFAB F11000-S6-1, or approved equivalent.



22 30 00 - Page 2 DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS

22 30 04 CLEANOUTS

Cleanout: interior finished floor (FCO):

Cast iron body, threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with straight thread gasketed plug and square secured satin nickel bronze scoriated top, vandal proof, tops shall be for tile, carpet, ceramic tile, terrazzo tile as required. Wade W-6000-TS-179-118, Zurn Z-1400-T-BP-VP, J.R. Smith 4052-U, MIFAB C1100-S-1-6, or approved equivalent.

Cleanout: interior unfinished floor (FCO):

Cast iron body, threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with straight thread gasketed plug and round secured satin nickel bronze scoriated top, vandal proof. Wade W-6000-1-179-118, Zurn Z-1400-BP-VP, J.R. Smith 4032-U, MIFAB C1100-R-1-6, or approved equivalent.

Cleanout: wall type for concealed riser in finished spaces (WCO):

Provide cleanout fitting with screwed plug opening and countersunk plug. Provide 8” x 8” square access covers with polished nickel bronze beveled edge frame with anchor lugs for over the wall installation, smooth stainless steel cover, and vandalproof screws. Wade 8480ST-179, Zurn ZANB-1462-8-VP, J.R. Smith 4730-U-NB, MIFAB C1460-S-3-6, or approved equivalent.

Cleanout: wall type for concealed riser in unfinished spaces (WCO):

Provide cleanout fitting with screwed plug opening and countersunk plug. Provide round access covers with smooth stainless steel cover, and vandalproof center screw. Wade, Zurn, J.R. Smith, MIFAB, or approved equivalent.



22 40 00 - Page 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES

General

1. Furnish and install the following plumbing fixtures where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall have all options, body material, water consumption, and accessories as specified where or not listed as a prefix, suffix, or catalog number. Include all necessary work in the related sections of the Specifications (subsection 22 00 03) and accessories to provide for complete installation and operation of the respective fixture.

2. All plumbing fixtures and non-metal accessories shall be white color, except where shown or specified otherwise.

3. Vitreous china fixtures, where specified, shall be best quality, non-absorbent. Warped or imperfect fixtures shall not be accepted. Enameled cast iron fixtures, where specified, shall be thoroughly fused and bonded to body without discoloration, chips, flaws or cracks. Finish all exposed surfaces.

4. Fixture trim shall be cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish on exposed surfaces, except where shown or specified otherwise.

5. Fixture traps shall be tubular wall type, minimum 17 gauge with integral cleanout plugs, polished chrome plated finish, except where shown or specified otherwise. Size to suit fixture tailpiece. Comply with local plumbing code.

6. All water closets, urinals, and lavatories shall be from the same manufacturer. All faucets, for lavatories, janitor sinks, sinks shall be from the same manufacturer. All supplies and stops for lavatories and sinks shall be from the same manufacturer.

7. Furnish accessories for fixtures requiring trim, carriers, brackets, back-up plates, specialties, etc. for respective complete installation.

8. Install all handicapped fixtures to respective ADA Standards requirements per Federal Register 28 CFR part 36, July 26, 1991.

9. Provide stops (valves) in all water supplies to all fixtures.

10. Provide escutcheon plates for all wall penetrations for exposed connections to fixtures.

11. Division 22 shall provide templates of openings required for countertop mounted fixtures to the General Contractor.

12. Connections between plumbing fixture outlets and respective waste piping shall be gas and watertight. Use suitable and approved setting compound or gasket; rubber gaskets or putty are not acceptable.

13. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Fixtures - American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, Crane

b. Carrier - Wade, Zurn, J.R. Smith, Watts

c. Flush Valve – Sloan, Royal, Zurn

d. Supplies, Strainer, Traps – McGuire, Dearborn, Brass Craft, Engineered Brass, American Standard, Kohler, Eljer.

e. Faucets: Chicago, Kohler, Delta, American Standard, Zurn




22 40 01 WATER CLOSET: FLOOR MOUNTED (W-A):

Toilet:

Vitreous china elongated bowl, 1.6 gal/flush, siphon-jet, floor mounted 17” rim height, with 1-1/2” top inlet spud. Conforms to ANSI Standard A112.19.2M fixture dimensions. Kohler “Anglesey” K-4352-L-0, American Standard “Priolo” model 3995.001.020.

Seat:

Solid plastic, open front less cover for elongated bowl, integral bumpers and external check hinges with stainless steel bolts. Church #2155SSCT, Bemis #1955SSCT.

Flush Valve (Automatic Flush Valve):

Quiet, exposed diaphragm type, closet flushometer, infrared sensor, non-hold-open, integral 24 VAC solenoid operator, 1” IPS screw driver angle stop with protective cap, adjustable tail piece, vacuum breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 1-1/2” top spud, wall and spud flanges. Sloan Royal model no. 111-1.28 DFB ESS MOD (less transformer). Flush valve shall be located on the side with more room.

22 40 02 WATER CLOSET: FLOOR MOUNTED HANDICAPPED (W-B)

Toilet:

Vitreous china elongated bowl, 1.6 gal/flush, siphon-jet, floor mounted 17” rim height, with 1-1/2” top inlet spud. Conforms to ANSI Standard A112.19.2M, ADA, and ANSI 117-1 fixture dimensions. Kohler “Highcliff Ultra” K-96057-SS, American Standard “Madera FloWise” model 2234.001.

Seat:

Solid plastic, open front less cover for elongated bowl, integral bumpers and external check hinges with stainless steel bolts. Church #2155SSCT, Bemis #1955SSCT.

Flush Valve (Automatic Flush Valve):

Quiet, exposed diaphragm type, closet flushometer, infrared sensor, non-hold-open, integral 24 VAC solenoid operator, 1” IPS screw driver angle stop with protective cap, adjustable tail piece, vacuum breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 1-1/2” top spud, wall and spud flanges. Sloan Royal model no. 111-1.28 DFB ESS MOD (less transformer). Flush valve shall be located on the side with more room.

22 42 02 LAVATORY: WHEELCHAIR ACCESSIBLE, WALL-HUNG (L-A)

Lavatory:

Vitreous china with front overflow, faucet ledge, concealed carrier arms, self-draining deck area with contoured back and side splash shields. Nominal size: 22” x 18” with ” oval bowl. Single faucet hole. Conforms to ANSI Standard A112.19.2 for fixture dimensions. Kohler “Pinoir” model K-2035-1.

Faucet:

Infrared sensor operated automatic lavatory faucet, adjustable run-time, adjustable sensor range, serviceable strainer, single 24 VAC solenoid valve, 0.5 gpm vandalproof spray head. All wires shall be metal jacketed. (Thermostatic temperature mixing valve with hot and cold water supply check valves). American Standard 2506.165.

Wheelchair Lavatory Strainer:

1-1/4” x 5” offset x 17 gauge cast brass grid strainer, integral spud and tailpiece. McGuire Mfg. catalog no. 155-WC. Dearborn Brass catalog no. 760W.




Supplies:

Loose keyed angle stops with lock shield caps and ½” (nominal) copper solder (5/8” ODS) inlet x 1/2” OD outlet x 12” long flexible risers. Provide cast brass escutcheons. Chicago Faucet no. 1027-CP with no. 1003 escutcheons.

Trap:

1-1/2” x 1-1/4” x 17 gauge tubular P-trap with clean-out, plug and wall escutcheon. McGuire Mfg. catalog no. 8902. Dearborn Brass catalog no. 510.

Insulation Kit:

Conforms to 28CFR Part 36, Article 4.19.4 (7/26/91). Truebro model no. 103W. Dearborn Brass catalog no. 515FST and 515KIT.

Carrier: Adjustable concealed arm lavatory carrier with rectangular steel uprights, block base anchor feet and extended arm supports. Wade catalog no. W-520-M24-M36 or Zurn Z-1231-79. J.R. Smith 0700-27-M31, Watts CA-411-WC. MIFAB MC-42.

22 43 01 SINK: STAINLESS STEEL, SINGLE COMPARTMENT, COUTERTOP WITH SWING SPOUT (S-A):

Sink:

18 gauge, type 302 stainless steel, self-rim single bowl sink. Inside bowl dimensions: 14” x 14” x 10”. Faucet deck with (1) hole. Elkay model #DLR172010.

Faucet:

Single hole, 8-3/4” swing spout, single lever handle, aerator. 1.5 gpm. Symmons Origins model S-23.

Strainer:

Stainless steel crumb basket with rubber stop for 3-1/2” drain opening and 1-1/2” OD brass tailpiece. Elkay model No. LK-35.

Supplies:

Loose keyed angle stops with lock shield caps and ½” (nominal) copper solder (5/8” ODS) inlet x 1/2” OD outlet x 12” long flexible risers. Provide cast brass escutcheons. Chicago Faucet no. 1027-CP with no. 1003 escutcheon.

Trap:

1-1/2” x 17 gauge tubular P-trap with cleanout plug and wall escutcheon. McGuire Mfg. catalog no. 8912.

22 43 02 SINK: STAINLESS STEEL, SINGLE COMPARTMENT, WALL MOUNT WITH INTEGRAL FAUCET (S-B):

Sink:

Steris double flexamatic. Two station 64”x 27 9/32”x 51 ½”.

Faucet:

Laminar flow (both)

22 44 01 SHOWER: INDIVIDUAL STALL (SH-A):

Shower:




Individual Shower shall be for thru-wall piping and shall consist of the following: Heavy duty, pressure balancing mixing valve with integral screwdriver service stops and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Handheld shower with 1.5 gpm flow limiter Inline vacuum breaker Metal lever handle 30” slide bar for hand shower Polished chrome finish. Symmons C-96-300-B30-V-X or approved equivalent.

Contractor shall provide all accessory fittings as necessary to complete shower fitting assembly.



22 80 00 - Page 1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

22 80 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

General

1. Furnish and install the following plumbing specialties where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary considerations in the related sections of the specifications (subsection 22 00 02) and accessories to provide for complete installation and operation of the respective item.

2. Specialties shall comply with the 2011 Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act. Components shall be “lead free” equivalent of model number specified regardless if manufacturer’s prefix and suffix have been included.

22 80 01 WALL HYDRANT: EXTERIOR WITH BOX (WH-1)

.11 ¾” hose outlet x ¾” (nominal) copper sweat straight inlet, non-freeze, anti-siphon wall hydrant with bronze casing, approved ASSE 1019-2004 integral backflow preventer and polished nickel bronze, stainless steel, or chromeplated box. Wade W-8600L-175, Zurn Z-1300, J.R. Smith 5519, Watts HY-429 with box, MIFAB MHY-26, Woodford B65.

22 80 02 HOSE BIBB (HB-A): INTERIOR (COLD WATER ONLY)

¾” hose outlet x copper sweat inlet with integral vacuum breaker. Woodford 26.

22 80 03 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Furnish and install all stainless steel shock absorbers at all solenoid, remote operated or quick closing valves such as restroom devices for each battery of fixtures. Install on both domestic hot and cold water branch lines in an upright position. Install in ADA water closet stall with wall access panel. JR Smith 5005 to 5050 depending on manufacturer’s recommended sizing.




23 00 00 - Page 1 HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

23 00 00 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 00 01 GENERAL

The Plans, the general provisions of the Contract including the General, Supplementary and/or Special Conditions and specification sections of Division 1 shall apply to Work of Division 20 of the Specifications.

Provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply to Work for other sections of Division 20 of these Specifications.


Work for this Section of the Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the Codes, Standards, etc., as identified in Division 20.



1. Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Conditions and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

2. Division 24 – Air Distribution

3. Division 25 - Temperature Controls


(none)


Furnish material, labor and services necessary for, and incidental to, installing the following systems where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary work in the related sections of the Specifications (Sub-section 23 00 03 to provide for complete systems.

1. Cooling system including, but not limited to, chiller(s), cooling tower(s)/air cooled condenser(s), heat exchanger, piping, piping specialties, pumps, chemical water treatment system, chemical pot feeder, relief valves, air separator, and expansion tank.

2. Heating system including, but not limited to, factory assembled/field assembled packaged hot water/steam boiler(s), heat exchanger(s), piping, chemical pot feeder, piping specialties, pumps, condensate pumps, unit heaters, convectors, fin tube, terminal heating coils, steam pressure reducing stations, relief valves, chemical pot feeder, air separator and expansion tank.

3. Air handling equipment including, but not limited to, central station air handling units, packaged DX rooftop air handling units, terminal units, return fans, exhaust fans, coils, condensing units and humidifiers.

4. Make-up water connections including, but not limited to, piping, backflow preventers, pressure regulators, water meters, and electronic level sensors.

5. Chemical water treatment of chilled water, heating water, condenser water.

6. Draining, filling, and venting of all modified systems as required for the above work. This includes scheduling shutdowns with the Owner (Refer to Section 20 10 70).

7. All seismic restraints for the above work (Refer to Section 20 10 40).



23 00 00 - Page 2 HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

8. Smoke stopping of all penetrations of pipes and ductwork, and firestopping of the same through fire rated partitions as shown on the Architectural drawings including, but not limited to stairways, shafts, corridors, floors, roofs, and required exits (Refer to Section 20 10 20).

9. Cleaning and pressure testing equipment, piping, and accessories installed under this section of the specification. (Refer to Section 20 10 50).

10. Provide sufficient labor and resources required for the testing and balancing (Refer to Section 20 10 80) and for the commissioning process (Refer to Section 152300).

11. Installing accessories specified under other sections of the specification referenced in Sub-section 23 00 05, including but not limited to, flow meters, control valves, thermowells, and taps for pressure sensors.

23 00 06 SUBMITTALS:

The Contractor shall submit the following for approval in accordance with Subsection 20 00 43, Duties of the Contractor - Submittals.

1. Piping materials, valves, and accessories as specified in Piping Materials Schedule(s) in this section of the specification.

2. All specialties including, but not limited to, thermometers, gauges, relief valves, pressure regulators, backflow preventers, flow switches, and vacuum breakers.

3. All HVAC equipment specified in this Division 23 including, but not limited to, chillers, boilers, boiler vent, heat exchangers, pumps, packaged equipment, air handling units, fans, terminal units and steam humidifier.

4. All general items specified under Division 20 utilized in the installation of work required by this section of the specification.

Provide manufacturer's technical product data of each material and accessory item with engineering support information, installation manual, operation and maintenance manual. Data shall be specific to product specified and clearly identified on all data sheets, which contains multiple models or sizes.

At the point where the mechanical system has been installed and checked by the Contractor and the systems are ready for testing and adjusting, submit a letter to the Architect/Engineer stating such. Refer to Section 20 10 85.


Contractor shall submit coordination drawings to the Engineer for review prior to any fabrication or installation (Refer to Section 20 10 50).



23 10 00 - Page 1 HYDRONIC PIPING

23 10 00 HYDRONIC PIPING

Itemization of the piping materials for specific system application are enumerated in the following sub-sections for the respective PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE. Specific requirements for materials shall be as listed in Division 20 Basic Materials and Methods.

Manufacturer's mill reports and applicable documents to certify the validity of the procured piping materials shall be on file at the Contractor's office.

Install all piping with pitch to vent or drain. Provide drain valves at low points and air vents at high points. Drain valves and air vents shall be ¾’ bronze 2 piece body ball valves with ¾” hose end adapter, cap and chain. In ½” through 2” pipe, contractor may use Webstone model T-drain. Use eccentric reducing fittings (installed top level) as required to avoid air pockets.

Gaskets and packings containing asbestos are not acceptable.

23 10 01 PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE, M-1

A. Service: Chilled water supply and return for HVAC. (Unless specified otherwise) Hot water (heating) supply and return for HVAC. Glycol water supply and return for HVAC. Generator cooling supply and return.

B. Rating: 125 psig at 350°F

175 psig at 150°F

C. Pipe: (Refer to Section 20 10 11)

1. 2” and smaller Copper, type L.

2. All sizes Black carbon steel, schedule 40, ASTM-A53, ERW.

3. Contractor has the option on piping 2” and smaller to use either copper or black carbon steel. Fittings shall be as scheduled below for the piping material chosen.

D. Fittings: (Refer to Section 20 10 10)

1. 2” and smaller Wrought copper, solder ends. 2. 2” and Malleable iron, 150 lb., threaded per ANSI B16.3.. smaller 3. 3” and Black carbon steel, buttweld. Elbow fittings shall be long radius. larger See Division 20 for acceptable branch arrangement in lieu of tee fitting.

Wall thickness consistent with connecting pipe.

E. Joints in Steel Piping: (Refer to Section 20 10 12)

1. 2-1/2” and smaller Screwed 2. 3” and larger Welded or




3. All sizes where concealed in chases or walls, or above gyp/plaster ceilings Welded

F. Joints in Copper Piping: 1. All 95/5 solder G. Valves: (Refer to Section 20 10 13)

1. Shut-off/service: 11. 3” and smaller Ball valve: two piece bronze body, stainless steel ball and trim. 12. 2 1/2” and Butterfly valve, ductile iron body. larger 2. Balancing/Throttling: 21. 12” and smaller “Circuit Setter” or “Auto Balance Valve” 22. 14” and larger Butterfly valve with memory stops. 3. Check valve – General Duty: 31. All Class 125, swing check. 4, Check Valve – Pump Discharge: 41. 2-1/2” and smaller Class 125, swing check 42. 3” and larger Class 125, cast iron body, silent check 5. Strainers (Refer to Section 20 10 14) 51. 4” and smaller Class 125, cast iron body, Y-pattern 52. 5” and larger Class 125, cast iron body, basket type 6. Unions: 61. 3” and smaller Wrought copper, solder ends. 7. Flanges:




71. 4” and smaller Cast copper companion type, solder end, class 125 ASME standard or class 150.

72. 2-1/2” and 150 lb, Black forged carbon steel, weld neck pattern (for welded

larger (pipe) 150 lb. ANSI Class flange equal to Victaulic 45 (for grooved pipe).

73. Pressure Test: Hydrostatic test at 200 psi for two (2) hours minimum.

23 10 02 PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE M-2

Service: Condensate drain piping.

Design: Atmospheric

Pipe: Type L copper

Fittings: Wrought copper, solder ends. 90° elbows are not permitted, use (2)

45° elbows or 'Y' provided with cap in unconnected straight run.

Valves: Two piece bronze body, stainless steel ball and trim.

Extend piping from all cooling coil drain pans to the location of discharging indirectly to the building drain system. Pipe size shall be unit connection size unless indicated larger on the plans.

Connections to the drain pans shall be made through a water seal trap with the downstream side vented to atmosphere.

23 10 03 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

Thermometers

1. Thermometer wells and thermometers shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of all air handling unit coils and where shown on the plans, piping isometrics, flow diagrams and details.

2. Thermometers shall be organic spirit filled in a 9” polyester or aluminum case, magnified

lens, glass or acrylic front, black divisions and numbers. Accuracy shall be ± one scale division. Stem shall be tapered aluminum installed in a brass thermowell. Stem length and lagging length shall be coordinated with the piping and the insulation. A minimum 2" insertion length shall be in the moving fluid.

3. Thermometers for use in chilled water having 1°F increments are preferred with a minimum range of 30°F - 100°F, in no case shall the range be greater than 0°F - 160°F having 2°F increments.

4. Thermometers for use in heating water systems shall have 2°F increments with a range of 30-240°F.

5. The submittal data shall clearly identify the range and the service the thermometers are used for.

6. Thermometers shall be Weksler AS5, Trerice model Adjustable Angle, Weiss Vari-angle, MILJOCO 935, or equivalent.




7. Where thermometer wells are installed below 5 feet they shall be installed on the side of vertical piping or on the top of horizontal piping so that they can be angled back beyond vertical to allow easy reading. Where thermometer wells are installed above 6 feet they can be installed on the face or the side of vertical piping and for horizontal piping it should be installed between 9 and 12 o'clock to allow the thermometers to be angled less than vertical without the pipe blocking the view of the thermometer.

8. Prior to installing the thermometer wells, the contractor shall have the thermometers at the jobsite and shall demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer where he intends to install them where they will be easy to read. If the Contractor fails to perform the above, any thermometers which are unreadable, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, it shall be modified at the Contractor's expense.

Test Ports

1. Provide pressure and temperature test plugs at locations shown on the plans, flow diagrams and details. Test ports shall be pressure and temperature test plugs. Plugs shall be self-sealing plugs. EPDM seals rated for the temperature, pressure and fluid associated with the application and shall be capable of accepting a needle type temperature or pressure probe and reclosing when the probe is removed. Furnish extensions for test ports installed in insulated piping. Plugs shall be provided with threaded protective caps. One temperature and pressure test kit suitable for the plugs used on the job shall be provided to the Owner on all installations where the plugs are used. Acceptable manufacturers and models are as follows:

Manufacturer Model

Peterson Engineering Pete's Plug Trerice Pressure/Temperature Test Plug Sisco P/T Plugs Bell and Gossett Read-out Valve RV-125A

2. Alternatively, access fittings may be provided in place of the Pete's Plugs. In this case, the fittings shall be provided with a retained cap and shall be Mueller Brass A-17130 or equivalent.

Gauges

1. Provide 1/4” ball valves gauge cocks at all inlet and outlet of air handling units and across control valves of air handling units and at the inlet and outlets of pumps and where shown on piping isometrics, flow diagrams and details. Provide gauges where shown on piping isometrics, flow diagrams, and details.

2. Gauges shall be 4-1/2” diameter, flangeless aluminum/stainless steel safety case with removable ring, bottom connection, with a recalibrator, and have stainless steel tube and stainless steel movement calibrated to ½% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A with a pressure range appropriate for each system. Open water condenser systems shall have compound gauges. Gauges located at pumps shall be provided with a porous stone type pressure snubber.

3. Gauges shall be Weiss Instruments UG2, Trerice 500XSS Series, Weksler AA44Y or equivalent by Marsh, or Marshalltown. Accessories from the same manufacturer shall be acceptable.

4. At pump locations utilizing factory taps in the casing or other locations where steel pipe is utilized, provide 1/4” brass screwed pipe and 1/4” 2-piece bronze threaded ball valve with lever handle for a gauge cock.




5. At locations where copper pipe is utilized, provide a ½” tee by line size connection in the piping and a ½” 2-piece bronze threaded ball valve, and 1/4” NPT bushing with lever handle for a gauge cock.

6. Provide a minimum of 3” straight gauge piping before any fittings or the gauge cock to allow insulation of the piping to a point where it will not sweat without the gauge cock being insulated.

7. All gauges shall be positioned where their view is unobstructed and can be easily read. If any gauge is unreadable, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, it shall be modified at the Contractor's expense.



23 23 00 - Page 1 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING

23 23 00 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING

Itemization of the piping materials for specific system application are enumerated in the following sub-sections for the respective PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE. Specific requirements for materials shall be as listed in Division 20 10 00 Basic Materials and Methods.

Manufacturer's mill reports and applicable documents to certify the validity of the procured piping materials shall be on file at the Contractor's office.

Gaskets and packings containing asbestos are not acceptable.


A. Service: Medical Gas, above ground B. Design: Pressure: 200 psig Maximum temperature: 150°F C. Pipe: Oxygen service, Type L Copper Pipe D. Fittings: Wrought copper, brazed


A. Service: Medical Vacuum, above ground B. Design: Pressure: 150 psig Temperature: 150°F C. Pipe: Type L Copper Pipe D. Fittings: Wrought copper, long radius 90° elbows, ‘Y’ type tees provided with cap for unconnected straight run.

23 23 03 MEDICAL GAS AND MEDICAL VACUUM TESTING

A. Medical gas and medical vacuum testing shall be performed per NFPA 99, System Verification.

The technical aspects associated with this contract will be furnished by the Owner. This contractor shall provide labor for the adjustment of valve, and shall provide nitrogen for testing. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing when all medical gas and medical vacuum systems are prepared for testing. Prior to Owner furnished testing, the Contractor shall perform Installer Performance Testing per NFPA 99. Installer performance testing includes the following:

B. Blowdown: Prior to installing system outlets, pressure switches, etc., the contractor shall

blowdown piping with dry nitrogen.




C. Initial Pressure Test: Prior to installing pressure switches and system outlets, Contractor shall pressure test piping at 150 psig for oxygen, nitrous oxide and medical vacuum. Joints shall be tested with soapy water. Piping shall be tested until all leaks are repaired.

D. Cross Connection Test: Contractor shall test all piping to verify that no cross connection

between services exists. Each service shall be pressurized with nitrogen individually, and all services shall be tested to verify no cross connections exist. Pipe labeling shall also be verified.

E. Piping Purge Test: At each station outlet, the Contractor shall purge the line until the purge

produces no discoloration in a white cloth. Nitrogen shall be used for purging. F. Standing Pressure Test: After initial pressure test is performed, and all outlets and accessories

are installed, the Contractor shall pressure test all services for 24 hours. Medical vacuum, oxygen, and nitrous oxide shall be tested at 60 psig. The only allowable pressure change during a 24-hour test shall be due to ambient temperature variation. If leaks occur, the leads shall be repaired, and the pipe retested.

23 23 04 MEDICAL GAS AND MEDICAL VACUUM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Medical Gas and Medical Vacuum Valves: B. Shut-off/service: Medical gas ball valve per 15100. Valves in concealed spaces shall be

provided with pad-lockable handles. C. Medical Gas and Medical Vacuum Pressure Gauge: Provide and install pressure gauge as

indicated on plans. Pressure gauge shall comply with ANSI/ASME B-40.1 gauges< pressure indicating dial type, elastic elements, and 1-1/2” diameter face. Additional requirements are as follows:

D. Oxygen, clinical air and nitrous oxide: Gauge shall have 0-100 psig pressure range, ±1 psig

accuracy and shall be cleaned for oxygen service. Medaes #0841-0014-300, Allied Healthcare Products #77-90-0571 or approved equal.

E. Medical Vacuum: Gauges shall have a 0-30 inch mercury vacuum range, ±1/3 inch mercury accuracy. Medaes #6812-2070-005 or approved equal.

F. Medical Valve Box (MVB): Valve box shall be constructed of 18 gauge sheet steel with

anodized aluminum cover frame. The frame assembly shall be capable of adjusting for variances in wall thickness. Box shall be provided with cover window and pull ring, color coded gas service labels, pressure gauges for each service per 15534.2, valves per 15534.1, valves shall be mounted so handles in closed position do not allow reinstallation of cover. Medaes Valve Box, Allied Healthcare Products Multiple Zone Valve Box or approved equal. Medical valve boxes shall be provided with a label stating what zone is fed by the valve box. Submit labels for approval.

G. Medical Gas Outlets: H. Wall outlets to be Puritan-Bennett compatible. Outlets to be by Ohmeda, Amico or approved

equivalent. Ohmeda oxygen (261040-1), vacuum (261040-5) with slide, air. Amico model O-PBCON-U-XXX.

I. Ceiling outlets to be Diamond compatible, manufacture red by Ohmeda, Amico or approved

equivalent. Ohmeda Diamond oxygen (261010-1), vacuum (261010-5), air (261010-13). Amico model O-QDWAL-U-XXX.




J. Medical Alarm Panel: Panel shall be a UL 1069 device with four (4) module spaces per panel. Power shall be double fused 110-250 VAC 50/60 hertz with a built-in transformer to convert to 24 VAC. Panel shall be Beacon Medaes Model MEGA2 “6-M2-L-OAVB”. Provide pressure transducers with quick disconnect.

23 23 09 MEDICAL GAS MANIFOLDS

New medical gas head end manifolds shall be provided for Carbon Dioxide systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.

Manifolds shall accommodate four high pressure cylinders equally divided into two banks for a specific gas service. The cylinder banks shall provide an uninterrupted supply of gas for the specific gas application. The manifold shall be cleaned, tested, and prepared for the indicated gas service and constructed in accordance with NFPA requirements.

A bank regulator (one for each cylinder bank) shall be used to reduce cylinder pressure to two line regulators which control final line pressure. The manifold shall automatically change from the depleted primary supply bank to the secondary supply bank without fluctuation in line pressure. After replacement of the depleted cylinders, the manifold shall automatically indicate the replaced cylinder bank as the secondary supply without manual reset of the control panel.

Manifolds shall include a line pressure gauge, two cylinder bank pressure gauges (left bank and right bank), and color coded LED visual indicators for “IN USE”, “READY”, and “EMPTY” for each cylinder bank. Manifolds shall have intermediate and line pressure relief valves internally connected to a common vent port. Master shutoff valves shall be located outside the cabinet.

Manifolds shall include high-pressure modular header assemblies with gas specific pigtail-to-header high-flow check valves to permit changing of cylinders without gas leakage. Stainless steel flexible pigtails shall be provided for each cylinder gas connection.

Power supply and control board shall be furnished inside a pre-mounted NEMA 4 enclosure. Control board shall include dry contacts for (2) separate isolated remote alarm connections for manifold changeover.

Manifolds shall be Beacon Medaes Lifeline Automatic Changeover Medical High Pressure by High Pressure Manifold, or approved equivalent.



23 73 00 - Page 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS

23 73 00 AIR HANDLING UNITS

23 73 01 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT MAU-9, 10

A. Furnish and install air handling unit as specified below, and as described in diagrams and schedules on the drawings. The unit shall include frame casing, insulated drain pans, energy recovery wheel latent, heating and cooling coils, fan assemblies, access panels for easy access to all service points, bearings, motors and drives and guards. This unit must be capable of providing 45.0°F dewpoint ventilation air to the O.R. air handling units.

B. The units shall be constructed of welded or bolted angle or channel steel frames. The casings

shall be a minimum of 18 ga. G90 galvanized sheet metal. The entire frame assembly shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication, or suitably treated with a rust inhibitor coating. The interior of the casing shall be solid lining of a minimum of 20 ga. G90 metal insulated with 2” 1 ½ lb. high-density fiberglass insulation. Hinged access doors with camlocks and heavy duty hinges shall be provided for ready access to bearings, motors, drives, coils, piping devices and connections, and other points required for maintenance service or inspection. Condensate drain pans shall be installed with 2” of insulation provided between the drain pan and the casing and shall drain both the coil and the fan; units with multiple vertically stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan. The pans shall be of continuously welded seams, Series 300 stainless steel construction, 'V' shaped and/or sloping to the drain connection, flat pans will not be acceptable. Drain pans shall be located in the coil section and in the fan section.

C. Entire air handling unit shall set on base rails to allow deep condensate trap and where shown

on the plans extended base rails shall be provided to support external filter housing and sheet metal transitions. Base rails shall be a minimum of 6” height where no size is indicated on the plans. The exterior of the unit shall be G90 galvanized metal or shall be painted with a minimum of two coats of factory applied rust inhibitor paint or enamel.

D. Fans shall have capacities and minimum wheel diameters as indicated on the schedules.

Each fan shall be of the non- overloading centrifugal type with deep drawn inlet rings, streamlined housing and scroll, with blades continuously welded to the flange, solid backplate, full curved shroud, and flanged discharge collar. Where Class II construction is required, wheels shall be reinforced with a welded intermediate ring. Fan bearings shall be heavy duty, self-aligning, grease lubricated, antifriction type with double row rollers and labyrinth grease seals. Grease fittings shall be extended through the unit housing. Provide drain openings at the bottom of each fan scroll. Each fan shall be equipped with an adjustable pitch V-belt drive selected for 1.5 times the motor horsepower, motor sliderail base and dripproof motor. Fans and motors shall be resiliently mounted on a single structural base, internally mounted with resilient mounts on the unit structural frame. Fans shall be plenum direct drive or belt drive as scheduled. Forward curved fans may be used only where specifically scheduled. Internal resilient mounting shall be spring type with minimum 1-1/2” static deflection and provided with seismic restraints.

E. Manufacturer shall use the most energy efficient fan option within the manufacturer's line for

the unit size but in no case will the wheel be smaller than the diameters scheduled. F. The units shall be provided with coils of the types and capacities scheduled. Cooling coil

casing shall be Series 300 stainless steel, others shall be galvanized steel. Coils shall be constructed with no less than ½” diameter x .020” wall thickness copper tubes and .0075” aluminum or copper fins spaced not closer than 10 per inch. Fins shall be permanently secured to the tubes by mechanical bonding or soldering and shall be plate type. Frame shall be shall include intermediate tube supports to prevent sagging of the tubes. The coil shall be




removable with removing casing panels (i.e., casing shall have its own internal frame and shall not use the coil for support).

1. Water coil headers and “U” bends shall be arranged so that the entrained air is carried

along with the flow of water through the coil to the high point on the leaving water header. High points in the coil shall be provided with vent connections. Multi-row coils shall be arranged for counterflow heat exchange between the air and water.

2. Steam coils shall be one pass (opposite and connections) non-freeze distributing tube

type with concentric steam supply and condensate return tubes. Inner steam supply tubes shall have orifices for even distribution of steam.

Desiccant Dehumidification Wheel Section

1. Desiccant dehumidification wheels shall be provided as indicated on the schedule and drawings. Wheels shall not require an additional regeneration airflow stream or the use of a high heat source. If any preheat is required it shall not exceed the scheduled capacity.

2. Dehumidification wheels shall not utilize exhaust air. Wheels shall have no exhaust air transfer.

3. Desiccant dehumidification wheels shall be for humidity control only. Rotational speed shall not be modulated for temperature control.

4. Cassette casings shall be constructed of heavy duty galvanized steel. Cassettes up to 7000 cfm shall be single face panel construction for easy service access to the wheel drive motor and belt. Larger cassettes shall be double face panel with removable side panel for access to belt and drive motor.

5. Dehumidification wheels shall be constructed of synthetic matrixes with an adsorbent integrally bound into the matrix. Adsorbents shall be type III desiccants. Construction of wheels shall be corrugated, fluted design to provide distinct air passageways and prevent internal wheel bypass. Desiccants shall be permanently bound and uniformly dispersed throughout the wheel matrixes to prevent erosion, abrasion, or delamination of the desiccant. Wheel matrixes shall be rigid and glued layer-to-layer. Wheels shall be structurally reinforced with spokes to minimize wheel deflection. Wheels shall be nonmetallic to offer complete resistance to corrosion. Media shall meet the flammability requirements governing this class of products and be UL-recognized in accordance with UL 1812 and UL 1995.

6. All cassettes shall include both circumferential seals as an air block-off around the perimeter, and inner diametric seals separating regeneration and supply sides. Seals shall be full contact nylon brush seals to minimize leakage. Seals shall be factory set and field adjustable and shall make intimate contact with wheels on all surfaces. Cassettes, wheels and seal configurations shall allow for operation at high differential pressures. Seal replacement shall not be necessary during the life of the product.

7. Drive systems shall consist of heavy-duty fractional horsepower motors mounted in the cassette and cooled by the AHU air stream. Drives shall use high performance v-belt multilink belts with 1¿ links to allow for replacement of individual links if a section of belt becomes worn or breaks. Belts shall be installed under tension, shall require no mechanical tensioner, and shall require no adjustment after startup. Rotation speeds of the wheel shall not exceed the scheduled value.




8. Wheel matrixes shall be cleanable by vacuuming or pressurized air blowing, or alternatively with low temperature steam, hot water, light detergent.

9. Cassettes shall be provided with bearings which support rotation of wheels around a center shaft driven by perimeter belts. All wheels up to and including 72" in diameter shall use permanently lubricated, no maintenance, internal ball bearings press fitted into the bored wheel hub to support the fixed shaft operation of the wheel assembly. All wheels larger than 72" in diameter shall use flanged or pillow block bearings to support the rotating shaft operation of the wheel assembly. Outboard bearings shall be provided with grease fittings for periodic lubrication. L-10 bearing life shall be greater than 400,000 hours at design conditions.

10. Wheel cassettes shall be capable of continuous operation over ambient temperatures ranging from -40 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit at any relative humidity without adversely affecting wheel performance or life.

11. Performance shall be predicted by selection software as scheduled and shall be based on testing conducted on the wheel cassette installed in the AHU configuration as shown in the AHU drawings. Performance based on stand-alone desiccant wheel cassette or tests with two independent air streams are unacceptable. Testing shall be performed and data collected on complete unit performance by an ISO 9000-certified laboratory. Temperature measurements shall be taken using instrumentation whose calibration is traceable to NIST standards. Dry bulb and wet bulb temperature measurements shall be accurate to +/- 0.1 degrees Fahrenheit. Performance predictions for the desiccant wheel in the AHU shall be available for multiple conditions as required.

12. Access doors shall be provided on all air entering and air leaving sides of wheel to allow for wheel maintenance, belt or motor removal.

The unit shall be Trane, York, McQuay, or approved equivalent.



23 82 00 - Page 1 TERMINAL UNITS

23 82 00 TERMINAL UNITS

23 82 01 UNIT HEATERS

Furnish and install unit heaters of types, arrangements, and capacities as indicated on the drawings.

Cabinet type units shall include a 16 gauge furniture steel casing, inclined blade type inlet and discharge grilles, removable panels, 120/1/60 fan motors, quiet operating centrifugal fans, non-ferrous hot water heating coils, throwaway filters, vandal proof fasteners, and air vent tappings. The heaters shall be arranged for mounting as indicated. Heater casings shall be finished in baked enamel with colors as selected by the Architect/Engineer. The units shall be Trane Force Flow, Sterling, Airtherm, McQuay, Engineered Air or equivalent.

Propeller type units shall have a heavy gauge enameled steel casing, deep pitch propeller fan direct connected to a resiliently mounted capacitor start squirrel cage induction motor 120/1/60, adjustable discharge louvers, fan guard, non-ferrous hot water heating coil with supply and return connection in rear of unit, arranged for hanging from top side hanger rod connections, and finished in the manufacturer's standard color baked enamel finish. The propeller units shall be Trane Model S, Airtherm Model HU, or Vulcan Model HV, Sterling Model HS.

23 82 02 VARIABLE VOLUME UNIT WITH HOT WATER HEAT

Unit casing shall be welded, galvanized steel. Leak rate shall be not more than 1% of rated capacity at 4” wg. Interior surface of unit casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined with 1/2 inch thick, minimum of 1.5 lb./cu. ft. density closed cell foam. Insulation shall be UL listed and meets NFPA-90A and UL 181. Factory mounted, removable panel on bottom of unit providing access to air valve and entering airside of coil. Straight flange or slip and drive rectangular discharge duct connection.

Factory mounted one or two row coil with maximum of 12 fins per inch. Full fin collars for accurate fin spacing and maximum tube-fin contact, 5/8 inch O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into the fin collars, leak tested at 300 psig.

Air valve shall be a 90° rotational damper flow control device with factory installed direct digital controls (DDC). All controls shall be furnished under Division 25 and mounted and wired in the factory by unit manufacturer. Manufacturer shall provide multiple point averaging flow sensing ring with high and low pressure pneumatic tubes compatible with DDC velocity pressure sensor. A calibration chart shall be provided on each unit.

At the Contractor’s option Division 25 may field mount controls at no additional cost to the Owner.

Units shall be as manufactured by Titus, Anemostat, Carnes, Enviro-Tech, Krueger Metal Aire, Nailor, Price, Tuttle and Bailey.

23 82 03 TERMINAL UNIT COIL HOOK UP

A. Contractor to provide valves and specialties specified herein and in section 20 10 13 Valves (not valves from a HVAC hose kit manufacturer). Two service valves and a manual balance valve are require regardless of memory function of balance valves.



23 82 00 - Page 2 TERMINAL UNITS

B. One of the following piping and specialty configurations is acceptable (piping components installed in the order listed):

1. Supply service valve, balance valve, tee with integral drain, hard pipe or hose to coil,

hard pipe or hose from the coil, tee with integral vent, control valve, service valve. 2. Supply service valve with integral drain (on coil side), balance valve, hard pipe or hose to

coil, hard pipe or hose from the coil, control valve, service valve with integral vent (on coil side).

C. When hoses are used at the contractors option they shall meet the following:

1. Internal diameter of the hose shall be not less than 90% of the ID of copper pipe, for the

pipe size on the drawings feeding the unit. Hose inner liner shall be EDPM rubber and shall be covered with stainless steel braid. Pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psig.

2. Hoses shall have one fixed end male NPT connection and one swivel end. The swivel

shall be a gasket-less JIC 37°F flared female connection, with companion flare x NPT fitting. Connections shall be stainless steel or brass. Hose kits shall be 24” long. Hoses using gaskets or o-rings are not acceptable. Hoses shall be Twin City Hose, ACE Hose, Hosecraft USA, Chamflex, or approved equivalent meeting the above specifications.

D. Specialty Valves incorporating auxiliary ports for p/t, drain, vent, etc. may be utilized

provided the arrangement meets the flow diagram and the products do not contain unions, gaskets, or o-rings. Valves shall be dezincification resistant brass and shall be rated for 200psig minimum at 200°F.

1. Service valve with integral drain /vent – Webstone Ball Drain, Cimberio Valve model

630B less strainer basket, or approved equivalent. 2. Service valve with NPT tapping, plus separate drain cocks – Apollo 7B-100, Cimberio

200MC, or approved equivalent. 3. Tee with integral drain /vent – Webstone T-drain, or approved equivalent.

23 82 04 HOT WATER CEILING MOUNTED RADIANT PANELS

A. Hot water ceiling mounted radiant panels shall be constructed of extruded aluminum with interlocking edges. Panels to have integral tube saddles thermally bonded to panel. Panels to be Airtite, Aerotec, TWA Panels Systems, Hydro-Air or approved equivalent.




24 00 00 - Page 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION

24 00 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION

24 00 01 GENERAL

1. This Section specifies air distribution systems.

2. The Plans, the general provisions of the Contract including the General, Supplementary and/or Special Conditions and specification sections of Division 1 shall apply to Work of Divisions 20 - 29 of the Specifications.

3. Provisions and conditions cited in this Section shall apply to Work for other sections of Divisions 20 - 29 of these Specifications.

24 00 02 REFERENCES, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

Work for this section of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with the Codes, Standards, etc. as identified in Division 20 in addition to the following:

1. ASHRAE, “Handbook 1997 Fundamentals”; Chapter 32 - Duct Design.

2. ASHRAE, “Handbook 1996 Equipment”; Chapter 16 - Duct Construction.

3. ASTM A90-81 (1991), “Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles”.

4. ASTM A525-91b, “Spec for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process”.

5. ASTM A527/A527M-90, “Spec for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality”.

6. NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”

7. SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standard – Metal and Flexible” – Second Edition.

8. UL 33, “Heat Responsive Links for Fire Protection Service.”

9. UL 555, “Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.”

10. UL 181, “Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors.”



Division 20 - Basic Mechanical Conditions and Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods

Division 23 – HVAC Piping and Equipment

Division 25 - Temperature Control


The size of the ducts shown on the drawings and in this Section of the Specifications shall be the outside dimension of the ductwork which will take into account any internal acoustical lining thickness specified for duct system or sub-system.

The term “supply air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean downstream of a coil.

The term “outdoor air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean ambient air that has not been conditioned.




The term “return air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean conditioned air that is returned from the space.

The term “mixed air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean air streams that are a mixture of “outdoor air” and “return air”.

The term “relief air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean excess return air that relieved from the building.

The term “exhaust air” where used in this Section of the Specifications shall mean air that is removed due to contaminates, odors, or heat.


Furnish material, labor and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of the following systems where shown on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. Include all necessary considerations in the related sections of the Specifications (Sub-section 20 30 03) to perform the Work completely.

Sheet metal ducts, sheet metal plenums, duct linings, flexible ductwork, dampers and accessories.

Air devices including adjusting the pattern controllers.

Louvers, louvered penthouses, intake/relief hoods.

Installing accessories specified in referenced sections above.

Smoke stopping of all penetrations of ductwork, and firestopping of the same through fire rated partitions as shown on the Architectural drawings including, but not limited to stairways, shafts, corridors, floors, roofs, and required exits (Refer to Section 20 10 20).

Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of other trades, and with the architectural and structural drawings.

24 00 06 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall submit the following for approval in accordance with Subsection 20 00 43, Duties of Contractor - Submittals.

Submittals shall include drawings showing joining methods, location of duct transverse joints, and duct support locations.

Submittals shall be required for all shop fabricated balancing dampers.



Contractor shall inspect each component of the heating and air conditioning system to eliminate rattles, air whistles, vibration, and mechanical system sound transmission. Rough edges in ducts, insecure dampers, turning vanes, fire dampers, etc., shall be corrected to assure no recurrence of the noise source. Each vibration isolator and flexible connector shall be adjusted to limit transmission of sound to the occupied space.



24 31 00 - Page 1 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK

24 31 00 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK

24 31 01 MATERIAL

All ducts unless specified otherwise shall be constructed from sheets or rolls of G-90 or better-galvanized steel, LFQ, Chemtreat. Fiberglass ductboard is prohibited.

All supply ductwork, unless specified otherwise, shall be constructed of gauges and reinforcement to 4” w.g. static pressure in SMACNA Duct Construction Standard – Latest Edition.

All return, exhaust, outdoor air, relief, and supply ductwork downstream of terminal units shall be constructed of gauges and reinforcement to 2” w.g. static pressure in SMACNA Duct Construction Standard – Latest Edition. Panels in all ducts 12” and larger shall be cross-broken or beaded on 12” centers.

External ductwork shall be Thermaduct or approved equivalent and shall be constructed with a panel insulation value of R-8. Contractor shall install and support per manufacturer’s instructions.

Where local code requires gauges heavier than required by SMACNA then the local code shall govern.

24 31 02 CONSTRUCTION

All ductwork shall be neatly constructed, stiffened, on the outside surfaces where necessary to prevent perceptible vibration or buckling. All ducts, housings, etc., shall be fabricated as detailed on the drawings and in the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual –Latest Edition.

All rectangular ducts unless specified otherwise shall be “Pittsburgh Lock” longitudinal joints. Snaplock is not acceptable.

All round ducts and flat oval ducts shall have spiral seams or continuously welded longitudinal seams.

All transverse joints in rectangular ductwork 24” and larger shall be Ductmate, SMACNA T-25, or approved equivalent. All flanged ductwork, regardless of pressure class, shall use gaskets, corner closures, and be TEK screwed or riveted on 10” centers with a minimum of two (2) per side. Transverse joints in rectangular ductwork smaller than 24” shall be made in accordance with SMACNA suitable with the pressure class.

All transverse joints in round and oval ductwork 24” and larger shall be Ductmate, or approved equivalent. Transverse joints in round and overall ductwork smaller than 24” shall be beaded sleeve joints.

Ducts shall be securely supported in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual – Latest Edition and in no case less than double thickness 1” x #24 gauge galvanized metal. Cable hangers are not allowed.

Ducts that are to be externally insulated shall not be supported on unistrut channel unless it required based upon loading. Hanger rods for trapeze bars shall be spaced to allow for insulation installation.




24 31 03 SEALING

Duct sealant shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for use in 4” static pressure systems. Sealer shall be UL listed and conform to ASTM E84. Sealer shall be equal to Ductmate PROseal, United McGill Uni-Mastic, Duro-Dyne DSW, or equivalent.

All supply ductwork unless specified otherwise shall be SMACNA's seal class A.

All return and exhaust ductwork between the new box and fan shall be SMACNA seal Class A.

24 31 04 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING

Installed ductwork on systems greater than 5HP shall be tested prior to installation of access door, take-offs, or other specialties.

A testing shall be scheduled for witness per the general conditions.

The supply trunk duct for each system shall be tested in whole before connecting to existing supply main.

The return trunk duct for each system shall be tested in whole before connecting to existing return main.

Exhaust ductwork for each fan shall be tested from 50' upstream of the fan inlet to the point of discharge.

Outdoor air and relief air ducts for each fan system shall be tested in whole.

Ductwork shall be tested as follows:

1. Ductwork shall be tested in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

2. Use a certified orifice tube for measuring the leakage.

3. Define section of system to be tested and blank off.

4. Determine the design airflow for the portion of the duct to be tested.

5. Determine the allowable leakage (cfm) for the section being tested.

6. Pressurize to operating pressure and repair any significant or audible leaks.

7. Repressurize and measure leakage.

8. Repeat steps .76 and 767 until the leakage measured is less than the allowable defined in step .75.

The following Leak Class and Duct Pressure Class shall be used to determine the Leakage Factor in cfm/100 S.F. Duct. Ducts shall be tested at the design pressure class. Max. leakage = Leak Class x (design pressure) 0.65

1. Rectangular Duct Pressure Class Leak Class All 6 (i.e. 4” duct systems shall be tested at 4” and the leakage shall not exceed 14.8 cfm/100

S.F. duct and 2” duct systems shall be tested at 2” and the leakage shall not exceed 9.4 cfm/100 S.F. duct).

2. Round Duct Pressure Class Leak Class All 3




(i.e. 4” duct systems shall be tested at 4” and the leakage shall not exceed 7.4 cfm/100 S.F. duct and 2” duct systems shall be tested at 2” and the leakage shall not exceed 4.7 cfm/100 S.F. duct).

24 31 05 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTED DUCTWORK

Contractor shall inspect all exposed ductwork for damage, dents, and out of roundness. Replace all imperfect ductwork.

Ductwork shall be sealed, tested (where applicable) and cleaned thoroughly prior to painting.

Galvanized ductwork that is to be painted shall be installed with paintgrip galvanized finish.

24 31 06 FITTINGS

Branch take-offs on rectangular ductwork shall be 45°-boot fitting, spin in fittings are not acceptable.

Branch take-offs on round or oval ductwork shall be conical or 45° conical as shown on plans.

Proportional splits shall be made the sizes as shown on the drawings. Where duct sizes are changed from the original design, Contractor shall proportion split equal to the split in airflow.

Elbows in round, flat oval, and rectangular radius elbows shall have a minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 that of duct size.

When approved by the Engineer ducts may be notched at structural steel. The converging angle shall be no greater than 30°, the diverging angle shall be no greater than 15°.

When approved by the Engineer objects may penetrate a duct. An airfoil shape shall be placed around the object to minimize turbulence.

24 31 07 PLENUMS

Sheetmetal plenums shall be constructed of a minimum of 18 ga. or greater as determined by the pressure class of the plenum. Sheetmetal and shall be braced and reinforced to support the weight of a 200-lb. person. Tie rods shall not be used.

Plenums shall be constructed without air turning vanes.

Plenums shall have access doors as sized on drawings, where no size is shown provide a minimum size of 18” x 36”.

24 31 08 DUCTWORK CLEANING

A. All ductwork and mechanical equipment delivered to the job site shall be sealed with plastic at both ends. This includes all straight lengths of duct as well as fittings. All ductwork stored must be stored off the floor to protect the duct from standing water contamination. Contractor shall ensure that all new ductwork is kept as clean as possible prior to installation. See Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines, following the Advanced Level C guidelines.

B. The contractor shall clean the ductwork as described in this section for the below systems:

a. AHU-3 supply ductwork where work is done




b. AHU-3 after repair work is complete

c. AHU-4 after repair work is complete

C. In addition to the above mentioned systems, if any of the new installed ductwork systems are found to not be properly protected as mentioned above in paragraph A, the contractor will be responsible for mechanical cleaning (refer to paragraph F) for any contaminated ductwork prior to startup at their expense. The engineer shall inspect all ductwork systems prior to startup to verify that they have been kept clean enough for use.

D. New ductwork systems shall be cleaned before air balancing and pressure testing has occurred.

E. The existing supply ductwork on AHU-3 does not all have to be cleaned if the contractor isolates the area of work to prevent all of the ductwork from being contaminated. Contractor may utilize inflatable zone bags to isolate the area of work so that only a small area needs to be cleaned.

F. The following items shall be cleaned by removing surface contaminants:

a. Air outlets, including but not limited to diffusers, grilles and louvers

b. Fans, housings, plenums

c. AHU internal surfaces including coils, drain pans, humidifiers, etc.

d. Supply air ducts, dampers, turning vanes, etc.

G. Mechanical Cleaning

a. Metal duct systems shall be cleaned by using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

b. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, or duct accessories. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

c. Contractor to install access doors in ductwork as required to clean ductwork. Vent vacuuming system to outside, include filtration to contain debris removed from ductwork and locate exhaust down wind and away from any other air intakes for the building.

24 31 09 AIR THERMOMETERS

Air thermometers shall be provided and in the supply air, coil discharge of all air handling unit coils, return air, mixed air, and outside air of the air handling units.

Airstream thermometers shall be bimetal type, with an accuracy of 1°F throughout the range with 5” dial size, 12” stem length, ½” N.P.T. back side connector with plain slip ring case of 304 stainless steel, and recalibrator. Thermometer shall be Trerice Model No. B85212 or approved equal as manufactured by Weksler, Marsh, or Marshalltown Instruments. Thermometers for use in the mixed air shall have flexible averaging elements strung with the mixed air temperature sensor and freezestat sensor elements. Mixed air thermometers shall be Trerice No. V80445 with bulb number 4-3-1.




Range shall be as follows:

Outdoor air -40-160°F Mixed air 0-100°F Supply air 25-125°F Return air 25-125°F Preheat coil discharge 25-125°F Reheat coil discharge 25-125°F Chilled water coil discharge 25-125°F




ACCESSORIES

24 33 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION ACCESSORIES

24 33 01 BALANCING DAMPER

Furnish and install volume dampers at each main branch take-off and in such other locations where required to properly balance the air distribution systems.

All dampers, except those located downstream from terminal units used to adjust individual grilles, shall have frames and bearings and shall have quadrant lock regulators with thread screw to allow damper to be securely locked into place.

Balancing dampers downstream from terminal units that are contactor fabricated or apart of manufactured branch fitting shall be a minimum of 18-ga. plate, 3/8” continuous shaft with locking quadrant handle equal to Duro Dyne model Quadline.

Rectangular dampers up to size 24” x 12” shall be Ruskin MD25, Nailor 1870, Arrow, Air Balance, NCA, or shop fabricated equal, approved by the Engineer.

Round dampers up to size 20” diameter shall be Ruskin MDRS25, Nailor 1890, Arrow, Air Balance, NCA or shop fabricated equal, approved by the Engineer.

Rectangular dampers larger than 24” x 12” shall be Ruskin MD35, Nailor 1820 or equivalent manufactured damper by NCA.

Remote balancing damper:

a. Dampers to be provided in OR supply and return branches as indicated on the plans.

b. Rectangular dampers to be Greenheck RBD-10 or approved equivalent.

c. Round dampers to be Greenheck RBDR-50 or approved equivalent.

Where volume dampers are to be adjusted through walls or ceilings, such dampers shall be operated by regulators designed for recessed installation and provided with a cover plate which shall be flush to the surface of the wall or ceiling. Concealed regulators, as manufactured by Duro Dyne Corporation or Elgen shall be of the indicator type. Regulator shall be provided with a spring washer for non-binding adjustment and hex lock nut in addition to wedge pin which shall be installed to prevent damper rattle. Cast alloy regulator housing, with “open to shut” range positioning markers, shall be secured with removable cover to expose regulator for adjustments.

All automatic dampers and control dampers shall be as specified in Division 25, “Temperature Control”. Dampers shall be furnished under Division 25 for installation under Division 23 30 00.

Control Damper Installation

a. Dampers installed in walls shall be installed with wall sleeves to allow direct coupled actuator installation.

b. Large damper installations with multiple actuators shall be installed with 8” sheetmetal blank-off/spacers between them to allow direct coupled actuator installation. Provide structural supports as required for a straight, true, level and square installation.




ACCESSORIES

c. Dampers shall be attached with fasteners on 6” centers with a minimum of 2 per side. 24 33 02 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Smoke dampers shall be provided as indicated on the plans. B. Smoke dampers with steel airfoil blades meeting requirements of UL Standard 555S, latest

edition. Dampers shall have a UL555S leakage rating of Leakage Class I for airflow in either direction and shall have a minimum UL 555S differential pressure rating of 4 in. wg. Dampers shall have a minimum UL 555S velocity rating of 2000 fpm.

C. Damper frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel formed into a 5” structural hat channel. Top and

bottom frame members on dampers less than 17” high shall be low profile design to maximize the free area of these smaller dampers. Frame shall be 4-piece construction with 1 ½” (minimum) integral overlapping gusset reinforcements in each corner to assure square corners and provide maximum resistance to racking.

D. Damper blades shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel with full length structural reinforcement and a

double skin airfoil shape. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper. Blade seals shall be extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to the appropriate blade edges. Jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type. Linkage shall be concealed in the jamb. Axle bearings shall be permanently lubricated stainless steel or sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in polished extruded holes in the damper frame.

E. Dampers sized as scheduled. If not scheduled, dampers shall be the full size of the duct they

are associated with unless noted otherwise. F. Actuators shall be listed with the damper assembly and be electrically operated, 24 VAC power

supply. Actuators shall be 2-position and shall fail in a closed direction. G. Damper options

1. Damper assembly shall come with a factory-mounted momentary permanent test switch to

operate the damper for inspection. H. Dampers shall be Ruskin SD60, Greenheck SMD-301, or approved equivalent. I. Dampers are to be tested by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner.

24 33 03 AIR TURNING VANES

Furnish and install in ductwork at all elbows directional air turning vanes and in mitered change of direction fitting greater than 45°, vanes shall be trimmed on the leaving air side to match the angle of fitting. Vanes shall be single rolled types rolled to a radius of 4-1/2”. Vanes shall be solidly installed and rattle-free locked into each slot of preformed vane guide rails as manufactured by Duro Dyne Corporation or Elgen. Rails shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized steel, specially embossed for extra strength and sturdiness. Vane slots shall not exceed 3-1/2” on centers.




ACCESSORIES

24 33 04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

Furnish and install flexible connections at the connections to air handling equipment as indicated on the plans. Flexible connections shall be U.L. listed fabric that meets NFPA 90A. It shall weigh not less than 24 oz per sq. yd and have a tensile strength of not less than 500 psi. Flexible connections shall be preassembled “Super Metal-Fab” with 6” fabric attached to 3” metal on either side by means of “Grip-Loc” seam. At least one inch of slack shall be allowed when making connection to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork. The flexible connectors shall be fastened to ductwork and equipment by screws, rivets or spot welding. Flexible connectors shall be No. MF6N as manufactured by Duro Dyne Corporation, or equivalent by Vent-Fabrics or Elgen.

24 33 05 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

Access panels shall be provided at all duct mounted automatic control dampers, fire dampers, in front of duct mounted reheat coils, multizone dampers, and as shown on drawings. Door shall be SMACNA Standard, 12” x 12”, double skin, 1” fiberglass insulation, hinged, wired plate glass or plexiglass door, Ruskin ADH22, Nailor 08SH or equivalent.

Access doors in casings and housings shall be fabricated double skin doors with 1” thick insulation between inner and outer surface as detailed in the SMACNA Duct Manual. Provide two compression latches equal to Ventlok #260 on each door. Where access doors provide for personnel entry into the system, they must be provided with inside/outside latch hardware. Provide access doors at all locations indicated on the drawings and into the mixing chamber of all air handling units. Size shall be 18 x 36, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Ruskin GPAD or equivalent.

For access panels required in ceiling, walls, etc. of the building construction, see Section 20 10 10.

24 33 06 STATIONARY DRAINABLE LOUVERS

Furnish and install louvers as sized on the drawings, coordinate opening framing with other trades as required for proper opening size and installation.

Louvers shall be high performance low pressure drop, low water penetration and drainable.

Louvers performance shall be AMCA Certified and shall meet or exceed the following specifications:

Static pressure drop: 0.15” or less at 1000 FPM through free area. Water penetration: Beginning point at .01 oz/ft2 - 1000 FPM minimum

Free Area: 50% minimum

Louver frame and blades shall be fabricated from 0.80” thick extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5. Blades and jambs shall have integral gutters for drainage of water. Blades shall be at a 37.5' angle on centers not exceeding 6”. Each louver shall be designed to withstand a wind load or other load of 20 pounds per square foot. Birdscreen shall be framed, rear mounted, and removable of ¾” x 0.051” expanded flattened aluminum.

Where louvers must be made up by multiple sections, the manufacturer shall submit with the shop drawings, all joint locations, methods of bracing/assembly. When the louvers are assembled per the shop drawings they shall meet the above specified structural loading.




ACCESSORIES

Louvers shall have a Kynar 500 finish with a dry film thickness of 1.2 mils. Color to be chosen by the Architect/Engineer from the manufacturer's standard colors at time of shop drawing submittals.

Louvers shall be Ruskin Model ELF6375DX or approved equivalent by Arrow Model 265, NCA Model XAD-6, or Greenheck Model EDK-602.



24 34 00 - Page 1 FANS

24 34 00 FANS

.1 General

.11 All fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Performance Air and Sound Certified Ratings Seal. Fan air performance ratings shall be based on test conducted in an AMCA registered laboratory in accordance with AMCA 210 Air Performance Testing and AMCA 300 Sound Performance Testing. Fan curve families (tables will not be accepted) and octave band sound data shall be furnished with submittal data.

.12 All fans shall have premium efficiency open dripproof motor unless indicated otherwise.

Fans with variable speed drives shall have inverter duty motors. All fans with V-belt drives shall be equipped with adjustable pitch sheave rated for 1.5 times the motor horsepower, shall have sliderail base, and shall have a belt-guard.

.13 All fan shafts shall be designed so that the first critical speed is at least 20% over the

maximum operating speed. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, anti-friction, pillow block bearings with a minimum life (L50) of 200,000 hours.

.14 Where fans are other than scheduled the following criteria shall apply: Fans shall be picked

at the scheduled flow and static pressure, fan efficiency shall not be more than 5% less efficiency than scheduled fan, fan motor shall not be larger than scheduled motor (manufacturer shall notify Contractor of any larger motor sizes, Contractor can pursue equipment substitution as required in subsection 150620), the fan rpm shall not be within 15% of the maximum or minimum allowable rpm, and in general the fan selections shall be based upon maximum energy efficiency but in no case shall the fan wheel be smaller than what is scheduled. Where selection point is within 15% of the maximum allowable rpm of the fan class, provide a higher fan class.

24 34 02 ROOF EXHAUSTERS

.1 Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings centrifugal roof exhaust fans of the sizes and capacities as scheduled. Centrifugal impeller is to be of heavy aluminum construction with backward inclined or curved hollow airfoil blades. Hoods shall be constructed of aluminum with rolled bead for additional strength and shall be easily removable for servicing. Overall height from the curb shall not exceed that of the models scheduled. Motor and drive assembly shall be vibration isolated from the base and housing. All units shall have U.L. wired safety disconnect switch, sound attenuating roof curb and backdraft damper, in addition to any other accessories listed in the schedule.

.2 Contractor shall install a vinyl coated steel cable from the motor cover to the base to allow

the motor cover to be removed for service but will not permit the cover to be blown away. Cable shall have eyelet or swagged ends with aluminum or galvanized fasteners.

.3 Units shall be Cook ACE-B, Greenheck GB, Penn-Barry, Domex, ACME PNN or approved

equal.



24 37 00 - Page 1 AIR DEVICES

24 37 00 AIR DEVICES

24 37 01 GENERAL

Furnish and install diffusers, grilles, and registers as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

Air devices shall be installed in the orientation and the pattern controllers adjusted as indicated on the plans, as indicated on the shop drawing, or through supplemental information.

Submittal data for all distribution devices shall contain the following information:

1) Room Number 2) Model Number 3) Flow Rate 4) Size: Neck and where applicable 5) Throw in feet: Based on 50-fpm velocity 6) Air patterns: Such as one-way, two-way opposite, corner, four-way, etc. 7) Pressure drop in inches of water 8) Sound rating 9) Airflow factor: Such as K factor or as required for airflow rate measurements. 10) Accessories: Such as volume dampers, deflectors, etc. 11) Three-color charts and balance instructions shall be furnished with submittal data.

Devices described below and indicated on the drawings are based on Titus. Similar design characteristics as manufactured by Price, Carnes, Metal Aire, Nailor, or Tuttle & Bailey will also be acceptable. Such substitute equipment shall be sized on the basis of ADPI performance, and shall be selected for a maximum of 0.05 inches w.c. static pressure drop and a maximum noise criterion curve of NC30. Return or exhaust devices shall not be smaller than sizes shown.

Ceiling diffusers shall be of the type, service, size, and finish as scheduled on the drawings. Border types shall be coordinated by the Contractor to be suitable for ceiling types grid width, tile types, drywall, plaster, concealed spline in which diffusers will be installed.

24 37 02 LOUVERED CEILING DIFFUSERS

In dry areas diffusers shall be steel construction, Titus TDCA or equivalent. In wet areas diffusers shall be aluminum construction, Titus TDCA-AA or equivalent.

Return or exhaust diffusers shall be similar to the supply air diffusers less the adjustable pattern controllers. In dry areas diffusers shall be steel construction, Titus TDC or equivalent. In wet areas diffusers shall be aluminum construction, Titus TDC-AA or equivalent.

24 37 03 SIDEWALL GRILLES - REMOVABLE CORE

Sidewall supply air grilles (SAG) shall be adjustable double deflection type with removable core with a separate mounting frame with a gasketed one-inch wide flange as scheduled. Sidewall grilles shall be similar to Titus Model 1700 with optional 07 directional blades. Sidewall return or exhaust grilles shall be single deflection to match sidewall supply grilles in appearance. Where registers are required (SAR or RAR), include a key operated opposed blade volume control.



24 37 00 - Page 2 AIR DEVICES

24 37 04 SIDEWALL GRILLES

Sidewall return/transfer grilles shall have fixed fins set at 38°/0° angle, separate one inch wide gasketed mounting flange frame. Returns/transfers shall be similar to Titus Model 33RL/30RL.

24 37 05 LAMINAR FLOW DIFFUSERS

Laminar flow ceiling diffusers in operating rooms shall be constructed using a maximum 6 inches tall backpan. The backpan shall have integral hanger tabs for securing the unit to the overhead structure. Each unit shall have an integral internal baffle for evenly distributing air over the entire face of the diffuser. The face of the diffuser shall be constructed of 0.040-inch thick aluminum and shall be perforated with 3/32-inch diagmeter holes on ¼-inch centers. The face shall be secured in place by quarter-turn fasteners for quick removal and sanitizing. Diffusers shall be constructed with HEPA rack and Knife-edge, filter to have gel seal. TITUS model number TLF-AA or approved equivalent.

24 37 06 FILTERS

2” and 4” filters shall be dust spot efficiency on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.1 and MERV 8 on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.2. The filter media shall be a self-extinguishing, non-woven cotton and synthetic fabric, UL Class 2. The enclosing frame shall be a rigid, heavy duty, moisture resistant, high wet strength beverage board die cut for dimensional accuracy with diagonal support members. The pleated media pack shall be bonded to the inside of the frame on all four edges to prevent leakage. The media support shall be a welded wire grid bonded to the filter media to reduce media oscillation. The media support shall be contoured shape allowing total use of the filter media for longer life.

1. 2” filters shall not have less than 14 pleats per linear foot and not less than 17 square feet of effective media (based on 24” x 24”). Filters shall be as manufactured by Camfil-Farr Filter model 30/30, American Air Filter model 300X, or approved equivalent.

2. 4” filters shall not have less than 21 pleats per linear foot and not less than 27 square feet of effective media (based on 24” x 24”). Filters shall be as manufactured by Camfil-Farr Filter model 30/30, American Air Filter model 300X, or approved equivalent.




25 00 00 - Page 1 CONTROL SYSTEMS

SECTION 250000

CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. University of Missouri Controls Specification. B. This section contains requirements for pneumatic, electric and digital control systems as

indicated on the contract drawings.

C. Contractor is responsible for providing, installing and connecting all sensors, pneumatic actuators, control valves, control dampers, electrical components and all interconnecting pneumatic tubing and electrical wiring between these devices and up to the Direct Digital Controller (DDC).

D. DDC controllers consist of Johnson Controls METASYS controllers, type NAE, DX, FEC, IOM,

AHU, VAV, VMA, or UNT controllers. Owner will provide Johnson Controls METASYS controllers for the contractor to install.

E. After all equipment has been installed, wired and piped, Contractor will be responsible for all

termination connections at the DDC controller’s and for checking, testing, programming and start-up of the control system. Contractor must be on site at start-up to make any necessary hardware adjustments as required.

F. Once each mechanical system is completely operational under the new control system,

contractor shall make any final connections and adjustments. For controls renovation jobs, contractor shall remove all unused sensors, operators, panels, wiring, tubing, conduit, etc. Owner shall have the option of retaining any removed pneumatic controls.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions apply to work of this section.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor's Qualifications: 1. Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the installation of digital control systems and

equipment, of types and sizes required. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years’ experience installing digital control systems. Contractor shall supply sufficient and competent supervision and personnel throughout the project in accordance with General Condition’s section 3.4.1 and 3.4.4.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical components of control systems which have been UL-listed and labeled, and comply with NEMA standards.

2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for control systems.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control




sequences. 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following information:

B. Product data for each damper, valve, and control device. C. Schematic flow diagrams of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices. D. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. E. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are

factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. F. Provide details of faces on control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. G. Include written description of sequence of operation.

H. Provide wiring diagrams of contractor provided interface and I/O panels.

I. Provide field routing of proposed network bus diagram listing all devices on bus.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Air Piping: 1. Copper Tubing: Seamless copper tubing, Type M or L, ASTM B 88; wrought-copper

solder-joint fittings, ANSI B16.22; except brass compression-type fittings at connections to equipment.

2. Flex Tubing: Virgin Polyethylene non-metallic tubing, ASTM D 2737, with flame-retardant harness for multiple tubing. Use compression or push-on polyethylene fittings. Tubing used above suspended ceilings to be plenum rated per NFPA 90A. See section 3.1.b for locations where flex tubing can be used.

3. Copper to polyethylene connections shall be compression barbed fittings or solder barbed fittings.

B. Conduit and Raceway:

1. Electrical Metallic Tubing: EMT and fittings shall conform to ANSI C80.3. 2. Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings: Wiremold 500, Ivory, or approved equal. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Indoors, per National Electric Code for connection to moving or

vibrating equipment. 4. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Outdoors, per National Electric Code for connection to

moving or vibrating equipment. C. Control Valves: Provide factory fabricated pneumatic or electric control valves of type, body

material, and pressure class as indicated on the drawings. Butterfly style control valves are not acceptable except for two position applications. Equip control valves with heavy-duty pneumatic actuators, with proper shutoff rating for each individual application. 1. Steam and Hot Water

a) Manufacturer: Do not allow KMC valves and actuators.




b) Water Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics. c) Steam Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics. d) Single Seated Valves: Cage type trim, providing seating and guiding surfaces for

plug on "top and bottom" guided plugs. e) Valve Trim and Stems: Polished stainless steel. f) Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon, self-adjusting. g) Control valves should have a minimum 100 psi close-off rating for chilled water

applications. 2. Hydronic Chilled Water and Heating Water

a) Hydronic control valves shall be pressure independent. The flow through the valve shall not vary more than +/- 5% due to system pressure fluctuations across the valve in the selected operating range. The control valve shall accurately control the flow from 1 to 100% full rated flow.

b) The valve bodies shall be of cast iron, steel or bronze and rated for 150 PSI working pressure. All internal parts shall be stainless steel, steel, Teflon, brass, or bonze.

c) Valves shall be DeltaP Valves manufactured by Flow Control Industries, Belimo P Series, Danfoss AB-QM Series, or approved equal. Belimo EV050 Series is not acceptable.

d) The valves shall have pressure taps across the valve for measuring the pressure drop across the valve. The pressure taps shall have ½-inch extensions for accessibility.

e) Control valves shall be installed with unions or flanges as necessary for easy removal and replacement.

f) Valve Tag shall include the model number, AHU being served, design flow, and maximum flow for that valve.

g) The control valves shall be delivered preset to the scheduled design flow and should be capable of reaching 110% of the design flow to allow for field adjustment for capacity changes.

D. Control Dampers: Ruskin CD-50 or approved equal.

1. Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2- position control. 2. Provide opposed blades for modulating control. 3. Dampers shall be low leakage design with blade and edge seals. 4. Provide multiple sections and operators as required by opening size and sequence of

operations, as indicated on the contract drawings. E. Electric Actuators: Johnson Controls, Bray, Belimo, TAC or approved equal. KMC actuators

are not approved. Size electric actuators to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. If mixed air AHU has return air, exhaust air and outside air dampers that are not mechanically linked then static safety switch must be installed and wired to safety circuit. Spring return actuators should be provided on heat exchanger control valves or dampers or as specified on the drawings. Control signal shall be 0 to 10 VDC unless otherwise specified on drawings. Actuators with integral damper end switch are acceptable. For VAV reheat valves, actuators shall have a manual override capability to aid in system flushing, startup, and balancing.

F. Air and Hot Water Electronic Temperature Sensors:

1. All electronic temperature sensors shall be compatible with Johnson METASYS systems.

2. Sensors shall be 1,000 ohm platinum, resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) with two wire connections. Duct mounted sensors shall be averaging type. Contractor may install probe type when field conditions prohibit averaging type, but must receive permission from Owner's Representative.




3. Coordinate thermowell manufacturer with RTD manufacturer. Thermowells that are installed by the contractor, but are to have the RTD installed by owner, must be Johnson Controls Inc. series WZ-1000.

G. Electronic Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Chilled Water, Tower Water, Heating Hot Water, and Steam Temperature Sensors a) General: The RTD/Temperature Transmitter/Thermowell assembly shall come as

a complete assembly from a single manufacturer. The Assembly shall be suitable for use in the accurate measurement of Chilled/Tower/Hot Water and steam temperatures in a mechanical room environment.

b) Calibration: Each RTD must be match calibrated to the Transmitter via NIST traceable calibration standards. Results are to be programmed into the transmitter. Results are to be presented on report as after condition at the specified calibration points. Assembly shall not be approved for installation until Owner has received all factory calibration reports.

c) RTD: (1) RTD type: 2-wire or 3-wire 100 ohm platinum class A (2) Outside Diameter: 0.25 inch (3) Tolerance: +/- 0.06% Type A (4) Stability: +/- 0.1 % over one year. (5) TCR: 0.00385 (ohm/ohm/oC). (6) RTD shall be tip sensitive. (7) Resistance vs. Temperature table for the RTD must be provided to the

Owner. d) Transmitter:

(1) Transmitter shall be match calibrated to the RTD and assembled as a matched pair.

(2) Type: 2 wire (loop powered) (3) Input: 2 or 3 wire 100 ohm platinum class A or class B RTD (4) Output: Output shall be a 4-20 mA signal linear to temperature (5) Calibrated Span:

(a) Chilled Water: 30 oF to 130 oF. (b) Tower Water: 30 oF to 130 oF. (c) Hot Water: 100 oF to 250 oF. (d) Steam: 150 oF to 450 oF

(6) Calibration Accuracy, including total of all errors, of the Transmitter & RTD matched pair over the entire span shall be within +/- 0.2% of the calibrated span or +/- 0.18 oF, whichever is greater.

(7) Supply Voltage: 24 VDC. (8) Ambient Operating Temp.: 32 to 122 oF (9) Epoxy potted for moisture resistance. (10) Mounting: Transmitter shall be mounted in the RTD connection head.

e) Thermowell (1) Thermowell shall be suitable for immersion in chilled/hot water and steam. (2) Thermowell shall be reduced tip. (3) Thermowell shall be one piece stainless steel machined from solid bar stock. (4) Thermowell shall have 1/2” NPT process connection to pipe thread-o-let. (5) Thermowell Insertion depth shall be ½ the inside pipe diameter but not to

exceed 10”. f) Assembly:

(1) Assembly configuration: Spring loaded RTD with thermowell-double ended hex-connection head.

(2) Connection head shall be cast aluminum with chain connecting cap to body, have 1/2” NPT process and 3/4” NPT conduit connections, and a sealing gasket between cap and body.




g) RTD/Temperature Transmitter/Thermowell assembly shall be the following or approved equal: (1) Manufacturer: Pyromation, Inc. (2) Chilled Water: RAF185L-S4C[length code]08-SL-8HN31,TT440-385U-S(30-

130)F with calibration SMC(40,60)F (3) Tower Water: RAF185L-S4C[length code]08-SL-8HN31,TT440-385U-

S(5130)F with calibration SMC(55,85)F (4) Hot Water: RAF185L-S4C[length code]08T2-SL-8HN31,TT440-385U-S(100-

250)F with calibration SMC(140,180)F (5) Steam: RAT185H-S4C[length code]08T2-SL-8HN31,TT440-385U-S(150-

450)F with calibration SMC(300,350)F

H. Occupant Override: Provide wall mounted occupant override button in locations shown on drawings.

I. Low Limit Controllers: Provide unit-mounted low limit controllers, of rod-and-tube type, with an

adjustable set point and a manual reset. Capillary shall be of adequate length to horizontally traverse face of cooling coil every 12". Multiple low limit controllers may be required for large coils. Controller shall have an extra set of contactors for connection to control panel for alarm status. Locate the thermostat case and bellows where the ambient temperature is always warmer than the set point. 1. Freeze Stats: Johnson Controls model A70HA-1 or approved equal.

J. Humidistats: Humidistats must be contamination resistant, capable of ±2% RH accuracy, have

field adjustable calibration and provide a linear proportional signal. 1. HD20K-T91 or equivalent.

K. Humidity High Limit

1. Multi-function device that can function as a high limit or proportional override humidity controller, as stand-alone proportional controller, or a stand-alone two-position controller. a) Johnson Controls TRUERH HL-67N5-8N00P or approved equal.

L. Fan/Pump Status: Status points for fan or pump motors with a VFD must be connected to the

terminal strip of the VFD for status indication. Current switches: Current switches are required for fan and pump statuses that are not connected to a VFD. The switches must have an adjustable trip setpoint with LED indication and be capable of detecting broken belts or couplings. Units shall be powered by monitored line, UL listed and CE certified, and have a five year warranty. 1. Kele, Hawkeye or approved equal.

M. Relays Used for Fan and Pump Start/Stop: Must have LED indication and be mounted

externally of starter enclosure or VFD. 1. Kele, RIBU1C or approved equal.

N. Power Supply Used to Provide Power to Contractor-Provided Control Devices: Shall have

adjustable DC output, screw terminals, overload protection and 24 VAC and 24 VDC output. 1. Kele, DCPA-1.2 or approved equal.

O. Pressure Differential Switch:

1. Fans: NECC model DP222 or approved equal. P. Differential Pressure Transmitter: Provide units with linear analog 4-20mA output proportional

to differential pressure, compatible with the Johnson METASYS Systems. 1. Air: Units shall be capable of measuring a differential pressure of 0 to 5 in. WC.




Accuracy shall be +/- 1.0% full scale with a compensated temperature range of 40 to 149 deg F and a maximum working pressure of 250 psig. a) Setra model 267, or approved equal. b) Shall be installed in control panel and piped 2/3 down the duct unless shown

otherwise or approved by owners representative.

Q. High Static Pressure Limit Switch: Provide pressure high limit switch to open contact in fan circuit to shut down the supply fan when the inlet static pressure rises above the set point. Provide with an adjustable set point, a manual reset button, 2 SPST (normally closed) contacts, and ¼” compression fittings. 1. Kele model AFS-460-DDS, or approved equal.

R. AIRFLOW/TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT DEVICES 1. Provide airflow/temperature measurement devices where indicated on the plans. Fan inlet

measurement devices shall not be substituted for duct or plenum measurement devices indicated on the plans.

2. The measurement device shall consist of one or more sensor probe assemblies and a single, remotely mounted, microprocessor-based transmitter. Each sensor probe assembly shall contain one or more independently wired sensor housings. The airflow and temperature readings calculated for each sensor housing shall be equally weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to output. Pitot tubes and arrays are not acceptable. Vortex shedding flow meters are not acceptable.

3. All Sensor Probe Assemblies a) Each sensor housing shall be manufactured of a U.L. listed engineered

thermoplastic. b) Each sensor housing shall utilize two hermetically sealed, bead-in-glass thermistor

probes to determine airflow rate and ambient temperature. Devices that use “chip” or diode case type thermistors are unacceptable. Devices that do not have 2 thermistors in each sensor housing are not acceptable.

c) Each sensor housing shall be calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates and have an accuracy of +/-2% of reading over the entire operating airflow range. Each sensor housing shall be calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). (1) Devices whose accuracy is the combined accuracy of the transmitter and

sensor probes must demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the performance requirements of this specification throughout the measurement range.

d) The operating temperature range for the sensor probe assembly shall be -20° F to 160 F. The operating humidity range for the sensor probe assembly shall be 0-99% RH (non-condensing).

e) Each temperature sensor shall be calibrated at a minimum of 3 temperatures and have an accuracy of +/-0.15° F over the entire operating temperature range. Each temperature sensor shall be calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

f) Each sensor probe assembly shall have an integral, U.L. listed, plenum rated cable and terminal plug for connection to the remotely mounted transmitter. All terminal plug interconnecting pins shall be gold plated.

g) Each sensor assembly shall not require matching to the transmitter in the field. h) A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature measuring

probe(s) and transmitter at a given measurement location. 4. Duct and Plenum Sensor Probe Assemblies

a) Sensor housings shall be mounted in an extruded, gold anodized, 6063 aluminum tube probe assembly. Thermistor probes shall be mounted in sensor housings




using a waterproof marine grade epoxy resin. All wires within the aluminum tube shall be Kynar coated.

b) The number of sensor housings provided for each location shall be as follows: (1) Area (sq.ft.) Sensors

<2 4 2 to <4 6 4 to <8 8 8 to <16 12 >=16 16

c) Probe assembly mounting brackets shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. Probe assemblies shall be mounted using one of the following options: (1) Insertion mounted through the side or top of the duct. (2) Internally mounted inside the duct or plenum. (3) Standoff mounted inside the plenum.

d) The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM unless otherwise indicated on the plans.

5. Fan Inlet Sensor Probe Assemblies a) Sensor housings shall be mounted on 304 stainless steel blocks. b) Mounting rods shall be field adjustable to fit the fan inlet and constructed of nickel

plated steel. c) Mounting feet shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. d) The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 10,000 FPM unless otherwise indicated on

the plans. 6. Transmitters

a) The transmitter shall have a 16 character alpha-numeric display capable of displaying airflow, temperature, system status, configuration settings and diagnostics. Configuration settings and diagnostics shall be accessed through a pushbutton interface on the main circuit board. Airflow shall be field configurable to be displayed as a velocity or a volumetric rate.

b) The transmitter shall be capable of independently monitoring and averaging up to 16 individual airflow and temperature readings. The transmitter shall be capable of displaying the airflow and temperature readings of individual sensors on the LCD display.

c) The transmitter shall have a power switch and operate on 24 VAC (isolation not required). The transmitter shall use a switching power supply fused and protected from transients and power surges.

d) All interconnecting pins, headers and connections on the main circuit board, option cards and cable receptacles shall be gold plated.

e) The operating temperature range for the transmitter shall be -20° F to 120° F. The transmitter shall be protected from weather and water.

f) The transmitter shall be capable of communicating with the host controls using one of the following interface options: (1) Linear analog output signal: Field selectable, fuse protected and isolated, 0-

10VDC and 4-20mA (4-wire). (2) RS-485: Field selectable BACnet-MS/TP, ModBus-RTU and Johnson Controls

N2 Bus. (3) 10 Base-T Ethernet: Field selectable BACnet Ethernet, BACnet-IP, ModBus-

TCP and TCP/IP. (4) LonWorks Free Topology.

g) The transmitter shall have an infra-red interface capable of downloading individual sensor airflow and temperature data or uploading transmitter configuration data to a handheld PDA (Palm or Microsoft Pocket PC operating systems).

7. The measuring device shall be UL listed as an entire assembly. 8. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall review and approve placement and

operating airflow rates for each measurement location indicated on the plans. A written




report shall be submitted to the consulting mechanical engineer if any measurement locations do not meet the manufacturer’s placement requirements.

9. Manufacturer a) Primary flow elements, sensors, meters and transducers shall be EBTRON, Inc.

Model GTx116-P and GTx116-F or approved equal. b) The naming of any manufacturer does not automatically constitute acceptance of

this standard product nor waive their responsibility to comply totally with all requirements of the proceeding specification.

S. Electrical Requirements: Provide electric-pneumatic switches, electrical devices, and relays

that are UL-listed and of type which meet current and voltage characteristics of the project. All devices shall be of industrial/ commercial grade or better. Residential types will be rejected. 1. EP Switches: Landis & Gyr Powers, Inc. Series 265 - Junction Box Type or approved

equal. 2. Relays: Relays shall have an LED status indicator, voltage transient suppression,

Closed-Open-Auto switch, plastic enclosure, and color coded wires. Kele model RIBU1C or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.

B. Control Air Piping:

1. All control air piping shall be copper. Exception: Flexible Tubing may be used for a maximum of two (2) feet at connections to equipment [except for steam control valves] and inside control cabinets.

2. Provide copper tubing with a maximum unsupported length of 3'-0". 3. Pressure Test control air piping at 30 psi for 24 hours. Test fails if more than 5 PSI loss

occurs. 4. Fasten flexible connections bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and

protect against abrasion. Tie and support tubing neatly. 5. Number-code or color-code tubing, except local individual room control tubing, for future

identification and servicing of control system. 6. All control tubing at control panel shall be tagged and labeled during installation to assist

owner in making termination connections at control panel. 7. Provide pressure gages on each output device. 8. Paint all exposed control tubing to match existing.

C. Raceway: Raceway is to be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. Use of

flexible metal conduit or liquidtight flexible conduit is limited to 36" to connect from EMT to devices subject to movement. Flexible raceway is not to be used to compensate for misalignment of raceway during installation.

D. Control Wiring: Install control wiring in raceway, without splices between terminal points,

color-coded. Install in a neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code. 1. Install circuits over 25-volt with color-coded No. 12 stranded wire. 2. Install electronic circuits and circuits under 25-volts with color-coded No. 18 stranded

twisted shielded pair type conductor. 3. N2 communications bus wire shall be 18 AWG, plenum rated, stranded twisted shielded,

3 conductor, with blue outer casing, descripted as 18-03 OAS STR PLNM NEON BLU JK distributed by Windy City Wire, constructed by Cable-Tek, or approved equivalent.




a) Metastat wiring shall be minimum 20 AWG, plenum rated, stranded, 8 conductor stranded wire.

4. FC communications bus wire shall be 22 AWG, plenum rated, stranded twisted shielded, 3 conductor, with blue outer casing, descripted as 22-03 OAS STR PLNM NEON BLU JK distributed by Windy City Wire, constructed by Cable-Tek, or approved equivalent. a) Network sensor wiring (SA Bus) shall be 22 gauge plenum rated stranded twisted

wire, 4 conductor. 5. All control wiring at control panel shall be tagged and labeled during installation to assist

owner in making termination connections at control panel. Label all control wires per bid documents.

E. All low voltage electrical wiring shall be run as follows: 1. Route electrical wiring in concealed spaces and mechanical rooms whenever possible. 2. Provide EMT conduit and fittings in mechanical rooms and where indicated on drawings. 3. Low voltage electrical wiring routed above acoustical ceiling is not required to be in

conduit, but wire must be plenum rated and properly supported to building structure. 4. Provide surface raceway, fittings and boxes in finished areas where wiring cannot be run

in concealed spaces. Route on ceiling or along walls as close to ceiling as possible. Run raceway parallel to walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted. Paint raceway and fittings to match existing conditions. Patch/repair/paint any exposed wall penetrations to match existing conditions.

F. All devices shall be mounted appropriately for the intended service and location.

1. Adjustable thermostats shall be provided with base and covers in occupied areas and mounted 48" above finished floor to the top of the device. Tubing and/or wiring shall be concealed within the wall up to the ceiling where ever possible. Surface raceway may only be used with approval of Owners Representative. Wall mounted sensors such as CO2, RH, and non-adjustable temperature sensors shall be mounted 54” above finished floor. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with mounting brackets to accommodate insulation. Mounting clips for capillary tubes for averaging sensors are required.

2. All control devices shall be tagged and labeled for future identification and servicing of control system.

3. Preheat and mixed air discharge sensors must be of adequate length and installed with capillary tube horizontally traversing face of coil, covering entire coil every 24 inches bottom to top.

4. All field devices must be accessible or access panels must be installed. G. Install magnehelic pressure gage across each air handling unit filter bank. If the air handling

unit has a prefilter and a final filter, two magnehelic pressure gages are required. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND START-UP

A. Start-Up: Temporary control of Air Handling Units shall be allowed only if approved by the owner’s representative to protect finishes, etc., AHUs may be run using caution with temporary controls installed by contractor early in the startup process. All safeties including a smoke detector for shut down must be operational. Some means of discharge air control shall be utilized and provided by the contractor such as a temporary temperature sensor and controller located and installed by the Contractor.

B. The start-up, testing, and adjusting of pneumatic and digital control systems will be conducted by owner. Once all items are completed by the Contractor for each system, Contractor shall allow time in the construction schedule for owner to complete commissioning of controls before project substantial completion. This task should be included in the original schedule and updated to include the allotted time necessary to complete it. As a minimum, the following items are required to be completed by the Contractor for Owner to begin controls commissioning. 1. Process Control Network




a) The control boards and enclosures need to be installed in the mechanical rooms. b) The fiber optic conduit and box for the process control network needs to be

installed. Once in place, Owner needs to be contacted so the length of the owner provided fiber cable can be determined and ordered, if required. Coordinate with Owner to schedule the pull in and termination of the fiber cable. Power should be in place at that time. (Fiber for the process control network is required to allow metering of utilities prior to turn on.)

2. Heating System a) Pumps, heat exchangers, steam pressure reducing station, piping, control valves,

steam and/or hot water meter, feeder conduit and wire, VFDs, control panels and control wiring installed in the mechanical room. The house keeping pads must be poured before pump operation. All must be in place in working order (pumps aligned, VFDs set up by vendor, motors checked for rotation, steam regulators set to required pressure, condensate pumps operational, heating system ready to circulate (all piping pressure tested, flushed, and insulated) with differential pressure sensors in place.

3. Cooling System a) Pumps, heat exchangers, piping, control valves, chilled water meter, feeder

conduit and wire, VFDs, control panels and control wiring installed in the mechanical room. The house keeping pads must be poured before pump operation. All must be in place in working order (pumps aligned, VFDs set up by vendor, motors checked for rotation, cooling system ready to circulate (all piping pressure tested, flushed, and insulated) with differential pressure sensors in place.

4. VAVs-First Pass a) Power, (FC or N2 bus), and control wire installed before owner can make first

commissioning pass. First pass includes installation of VAV controller, termination of power, control and network communication wiring.

5. Air Handlers a) Prior to owner commissioning, at a minimum, the following items shall be

complete: Power wiring, motor rotation check, fire/smoke dampers open, control wiring including all safeties, IO cabinet, air handler cleaned, and filters installed as required. To protect the systems from dirt, outside air with no return will be used until the building is clean enough for return air operation.

6. VAVs-Second Pass a) After the air handlers are running and under static pressure control and the heating

water system is operating, a second pass can be made on the VAVs to download the control program and commission controllers to verify the VAV dampers, thermostat, and reheat control valves are working properly.

7. Exhaust and Energy Recovery Systems a) Exhaust fans need to be operational and under control before labs can be

commissioned. 8. Lab Air Controls

a) Lab Air Controls vendor will have the same requirements as stated above for VAVs.

9. Some balance work can be done alongside the control work as long as areas are mostly complete and all diffusers are in place.




3.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Contractor shall provide complete diagrams of the control system including flow diagrams with each control device labeled, a diagram showing the termination connections, and an explanation of the control sequence. The diagram and sequence shall be framed and protected by glass and mounted next to controller.

B. Contractor shall provide as built diagram of network bus routing listing all devices on bus, once wiring is complete prior to scope completion.


TreanorHLUM Projects # CP150752, CP150753 & CP150754


260500 – Page 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.2. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application and installation as specified in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."



260500 – Page 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves as specified in Division 26 Section “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling.”

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seals as specified in Division 26 Section “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling.”

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical raceway and cabling installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION 260500



260519 – Page 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:




1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.3. General Cable Corporation.4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.5. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN or THWN-2. (Minimum insulation rating is 90º C).

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. (To be used only where specifically permitted on drawings).

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.1. Minimum size conductor shall be #12 AWG.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.




E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 1. Metal-clad cable, Type MC cable is only allowed for lighting fixture whips up to 6’-0” long.

They must be dedicated whips.

H. Branch Circuits from Operating Room Isolation Panels: XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

I. Refer to drawings for other specific location where MC cable is permitted. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

J. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

K. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh,strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

L. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

M. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN-2, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Conductors and Cables from Operating Room Isolation Panels: Wire pulling compound or bundling shall not be allowed.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Owner shall be provided the opportunity to witness all testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test Feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.a. Isolated Power Panels

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:




1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


This page intentionally left blank.



260526 – Page 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:1. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS

a. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.




2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

D. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

E. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.




C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."


A. Perform tests and inspections. Owner shall be provided the opportunity to witness all testing.


1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Refer to Chapter 6 of NFPA 99. Specifically 6.3.3 for details of the requirement of grounding system testing.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.1. Provide testing reports according to NFPA 99.

D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10ohms.2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5ohms.




3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3ohms.4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 > ohm(s).5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




260529 – Page 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.2. Equipment supports.




B. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.




F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.




C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-

69].6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




260533 – Page 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Surface Raceways.

C. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Alflex Inc.3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.5. Electri-Flex Co.6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.7. Maverick Tube Corporation.8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.2. Fittings for EMT: Die-cast compression type.3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING





1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.3. Arnco Corporation.4. CANTEX Inc.5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.6. Condux International, Inc.7. ElecSYS, Inc.8. Electri-Flex Co.9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Surface metal raceway shall only be permitted where specifically indicated on the plans: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:




a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.2. EGS/Appleton Electric.3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.4. Hoffman.5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.




B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. Where underground

conduit emerges from concrete, Rigid steel conduit shall be used.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock.b. Mechanical rooms on walls below 7’ AFF.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: EMT10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.




2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Change from ENT to rigid steel conduit before rising above the floor.4. Conduit routed under slab on grade should be installed 12” below sub grade. Rigid metal

conduit shall be routed through slab.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:1. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes




or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

deg F temperature change.d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Refer to Division 26 Section “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling.” For sleeve specification and application.





A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.




260536 – Page 1 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes steel cable trays and accessories to be used for Low Voltage/Data Cables.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

2. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.b. Clearances for access above and to sides of cable trays.c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's

rating for tray and its support elements.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.

1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer who is licensed in the state where Project is located and who is responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported

cable trays.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Show the following:




1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering to cable tray. Unpack and dry wet materials before storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing.

B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.




2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Chalfant Manufacturing Company.2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.4. GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY Products.5. Legrand6. MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc.7. MPHusky.8. PW Industries.

2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, complying with NEMA VE 1.1. Electrogalvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM B 633; with hardware

galvanized according to ASTM B 633.

B. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.

1. Center-hanger supports may be used only when specifically indicated.

2. Cable tray shall be basket type, a minimum of 12” wide by 4” tall or as noted on drawings.

3. Cable tray divider shall be provided as noted on drawings

4. Cable tray shall be provided with tray liner.

5. Cable tray shall be sized to accept a minimum of 20% spare capacity.

2.4 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

D. Cable tray liner: Provide cable tray with a tray liner.

2.5 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."




B. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform design and production tests according to NEMA FG 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.

B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.

1. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements2. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules.3. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances

furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

4. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.5. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric

loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.6. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1.

D. Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.

E. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.

F. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.

G. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

H. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.

I. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.

J. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

K. Provide a cable tray liner prior to installing cables to hide cables from view.

L. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays.




3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected.

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Bond to ground bar in each telecom room.

C. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required by NFPA 70.


A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:

1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.

2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable tray do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers.

3. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that could damage cables.

4. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation.

5. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas.

6. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware.

7. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.

B. Report results in writing.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays.




1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

3. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.




260536 – Page 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Sleeve-seal fittings.4. Grout.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.




CABLING

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. CALPICO, Inc.c. Metraflex Company (The).d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.


a. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.




CABLING

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.




CABLING

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




260548 – Page 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.2. Channel support systems.3. Hanger rod stiffeners.4. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C.2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: C.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.b. Component Response Modification Factor: Variesc. Component Amplification Factor: Varies.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.134.4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.106.




1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports.4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.




B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. California Dynamics Corporation.4. Isolation Technology, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Mason Industries.7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Hilti Inc.5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.6. Mason Industries.7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.




1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

E. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

F. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

H. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different




structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.




260533 – Page 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Underground-line warning tape.5. Warning labels and signs.6. Instruction signs.7. Equipment identification labels.8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.




B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on

20-inch centers.

D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Furnish conduit identification for each conduit longer than six (6) feet.

F. Spacing: 20 feet on center. Starting within 12” of panelboards and continuing 20ft on center including both sides of any penetration, thru point of termination.

G. Color: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.




2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

C. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes each load connection.

D. Legend:1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.4. Nameplates used for warnings shall be red background with white lettering.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

3. Arc-Flash Hazard Warning: Provide label indicating ‘ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD Appropriate PPE Required”. List Flash Hazard boundary, Flash Hazard Category, Min Arc Rating and PPE Level Required.




2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a white background.1. Where identifying grouped equipment loads, Lettering should be a minimum of ¼” tall.2. Where identifying individual equipment and loads, Lettering should be a minimum of 1/8”

tall.

B. Each receptacle and switch plate identifying source panel and circuit. Labels on receptacle and switch plates shall be directly engraved with ¼” text. Adhesive nameplates, stickers or slide in labels are not allowed.

2.9 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F , According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.5. Color: Black.




2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.




B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: All junction boxes containing emergency feeder or branch circuits shall be painted with the colors indicated below. All sides of the junction box shall be painted to allow easy identification including cover:1. Orange: Critical Branch2. Red Stripe: Life Safety Branch3. Yellow: Equipment Branch.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied, heat shrinked (No cold applied permitted)b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral: White

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral: Gray

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.

E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.




1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.e. Enclosed switches.f. Enclosed circuit breakers.g. Enclosed controllers.h. Variable-speed controllers.i. Push-button stations.j. Power transfer equipment.k. Contactors.l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.m. Battery-inverter units.n. Battery racks.




o. Power-generating units.p. Monitoring and control equipment.




260573 – Page 1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

B. Scope of study to consist of new panels, feeders and branch circuits added as part of this project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. A preliminary Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative and Engineer at the same time as the electrical panelboard and switchboard shop drawings are submitted. Approval of shop drawings will not be provided until preliminary study has been submitted.

E. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. A minimum of two (2) bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. Electronic PDF copies of the report shall be provided in addition to two (2) USB memory sticks containing all study files, including all device curves. (Use the SKM “Project-Backup” command).1. The report shall include the following sections:

a. Executive Summary including introduction, Scope of Work and Results/Recommendations.

b. Short-Circuit Methodology, Analysis Results and Recommendations.c. Short-Circuit Device Evaluation Table.d. Protective Device Coordination Methodology Analysis Results and

Recommendations.e. Protective Device Settings Table.f. Time-Current Coordination Graphs and Recommendations.g. Arc Flash Hazard Methodology, Analysis Results and Recommendations including

the details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations, along




with Arc Flash boundary distances, working distances, Incident Energy levels and Personal Protection Equipment levels.

h. Arc Flashing Labeling section showing types of labels to be provided. Sections will contain descriptive information as well as typical label images.

i. One-line system diagram that shall be computer generated and will clearly identify individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location, device numbers used in the time-current coordination analysis, and other information pertinent to the computer analysis.

F. Other Action Submittals: Submittals shall be in digital form and shall include a minimum of one printed color copy.1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.3. Final Coordination-Study Report.4. Setting report.5. Final Arc flash calculations and report.

G. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. Coordination and arc flash study to be reviewed and updated to reflect any changes

within one week of the final electrical punchlist. Study shall include seal and signature of preparing engineer and allow for review and approval by Engineer of Record.


A. Studies shall use SKM Power Tools Electrical Engineering Software computer program (PTW 32). Manual calculations or studies utilizing other software programs are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible

for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide analysis performed by:1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc., PTW 32, Latest software version.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.




B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults.b. Simultaneous faults.c. Explicit negative sequence.d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2. Arc Flash Study:a. Calculate the incident energy and arc flash boundary for each location in the power

system. For risk categories level 3 or greater, the overcurrent protective device coordination study shall be reviewed to reduce the hazard/risk level.

b. Arcing fault current values.c. Perform arc flash mitigation/reduction studies and provide labeling for such.d. Provide Arc Flash labels.e. Specify proper level of PPE. (Personal Protective Equipment)f. Arc flash hazard analysis shall include the stamp or seal and signature of the

preparing engineer, and shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer of Record.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.1. Submit preliminary coordination study and arc flash hazard analysis with equipment

submittals. a. The coordination and arc flash hazard analysis shall included but not be limited to:

1) Service entrance equipmenta) All overcurrent protective devices installed in service entrance panels.

2) Feeder Circuitsa) All three (3) phase Feeder circuit overcurrent protective devices

installed with a rating equal to or greater than 30 amps.3) Branch Circuits.

a) All three (3) phase branch circuit overcurrent protective devices installed with a rating equal to or greater than 30 amps.

b) All motor circuit overcurrent protective devices for motors with a rating equal to or greater than 10 horsepower.

2. Revise coordination study and arc flash hazard analysis after relevant equipment submittals have been approved. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study. Provide in both hardcopy and electronic disk format. The computer disk shall include the complete coordination file including all device curves (Use the SKM “Project-Backup” command).

3. Prior to project completion, the coordination study and arc flash hazard analysis shall be provided in both hard copy and on computer disk. The hard copy shall include time current curves (for phase and ground fault settings) for each panel and the corresponding TCC report clearly showing each device set point. The computer disk shall include the




complete coordination file including all device curves (Use the SKM “Project-Backup” command).

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections

and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance.3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios.d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length.f. Busway ampacity and impedance.g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting

and stopping.b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush

current, and overload capability.c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of

start, and thermal-damage curve.d. Generator thermal-damage curve.e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company.g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.2. Medium-voltage controller.




3. Motor-control center.4. Distribution panelboard.5. Branch circuit panelboard.6. Three phase branch circuits with overcurrent protective devices installed with a rating

equal to or greater than 30 amps.7. Motor circuit overcurrent protective devices for motors with a rating equal to or greater

than 10 horsepower

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 141 IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.10.b. ANSI C57.12.22.c. ANSI C57.12.40.d. IEEE C57.12.00.e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on

electrical distribution system diagram.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using latest version of SKM computer software program. Prepare a written and electronic report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.2. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.3. Calculate the follow for Arc Flash:

a. Incident energy and arc flash boundary for each location in the power system.b. Arcing fault current values.c. Perform arc flash mitigation/reduction studies and provide labeling for such.

1) Identify any location other than the Service Entrance Main with a HCR>2 and provide recommendations for improvement.




d. Provide and install owner approved Arc Flash labels and work permits prior to project completion.1) Labels shall be consist of printed waterproof labels for each piece of

equipment with the specific arc flash hazard/risk category for that piece of equipment and appropriate PPE level.

e. Specify proper level of PPE. (Personal Protective Equipment)f. Arc flash hazard analysis shall include the stamp or seal and signature of the

preparing engineer, and shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer of Record.

B. Electronic models of all studies performed shall be turned over to the owner.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

D. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer.c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag.b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup

values.c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings.d. Fuse-current rating and type.e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:a. Device tag.b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.e. Cable damage curves.f. Transformer inrush points.g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.END OF SECTION 260573



260923 – Page 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Digital timer switches2. Photoelectric switches.3. Indoor occupancy sensors.4. Lighting contactors.

B. Equipment Qualitfication1. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously

involved in manufacturing or occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed.

2. Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide a five year complete manufacturer’s warranty on all products to be free of manufacturer’s defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIGITAL TIME SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or Pre-approved comparable product. Submit a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to initial bid date for pre-approval. The listing of manufacturers below does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the basis of design as noted on drawings.

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Intermatic, Inc.3. Lightlolier Controls; a Genlyte Company4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.5. Watt Stopper (The).6. Hubbell

B. Digital time switch1. The digital time switch shall be programmable to turn lights off after a preset time.2. Time switch shall be a completely self-contained control system that replaces the

standard toggle switch. It shall have a ground wire and ground strap for safety. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay.

3. Zero Crossing Circuitry shall be used to increase the relay life, protect from the effects of inrush current, and increase the switch’s longevity.

4. Time switch shall be compatible with all electronic ballasts, motor loads, ELV, MLV, LED and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating devices shall not be allowed.

5. Time switch shall operate at universal voltages of 100-300 VAC; 50/60 Hz.6. Time switch shall have no minimum load requirement and shall be capable of controlling

0 to 800 watt incandescent, fluorescent @ 100/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. 7. Time scroll feature shall allow manual overriding of the preset time-out period. Selecting

time scroll UP shall allow time-out period to scroll up throughout the timer possibilities to the maximum. Time scroll DN (down) shall allow time-out period to scroll down to minimum.

8. Time switch shall have the option for a one second light flash warning at five minutes before the timer runs out and twice when the countdown reaches one minute (when used to control lighting loads).

9. Time switch shall have the option for a beep warning that shall sound every five seconds once the time switch countdown reaches one minute.

10. Time switch shall have manual feature for timer reset where pressing the ON/OFF switch for more than 2 seconds resets the timer to the programmed time-out period.

11. Time switch shall have an electroluminescent backlit Liquid Crystal Display that shows the timer’s countdown.




12. Time switch shall fit behind a decorator style faceplate. The calibration switch for setting time-out, time scroll, one second light flash, and beep warning shall be concealed to prevent tampering of adjustments and hardware.

13. Time-out period shall be adjustable in increments of 5 minutes from 5 minutes to 1 hour, and in increments of 15 minutes from 1 hour to 12 hours.

14. Time switch shall be capable of operating as an ON/OFF switch.15. For ease of installation and cleaner wiring, the switch shall utilize terminal style wiring.16. The time switch shall not protrude more than 1/8” from the wall and should blend in

aesthetically.17. For safety, the time switch shall have a 100% OFF override switch with no leakage

current to the load. 18. For safety, in the event there is an open circuit in the AC line such as a ballast or lamp

failure, the time switch shall automatically switch to OFF mode.19. To ensure quality and reliability, time switch shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002

certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%.20. Time switch shall have 5 year warranty and shall be UL and CUL listed.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Basis of design product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wattstopper; Legrand Group devices as indicated on Drawings or, or Pre-approved comparable product. Submit a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to initial bid date for pre-approval. The listing of manufacturers below does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the basis of design as noted on drawings.

B. Digital Ceiling mounted occupancy sensor system.1. Ceiling mounted passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive

infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.

2. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:a. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:

1) Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments 2) Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments 3) Test mode – Five second time delay 4) Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or

re-activation.5) Walk-through mode6) Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight

enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.b. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.c. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld

commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.d. Device Status LEDs including:

1) PIR Detection2) Ultrasonic detection3) Configuration mode4) Load binding

e. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.




f. Manual override of controlled loads.3. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.4. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the

free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.5. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC

C. DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES1. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration;

available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features:a. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote

controls.b. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttors and/or alternate

color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

c. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.d. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following

characteristics:1) Bi-level LED2) Dim locator level indicates power to switch3) Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

e. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.

2. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network. 3. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the

free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching.

4. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:a. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from

Load to Scene, and vice versa).b. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0

seconds to 18 hours.e. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load

type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.5. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-

105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101.

D. ROOM CONTROLLERS1. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the

space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features:a. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation

based upon the devices in the room.b. Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a

room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.

c. Device Status LEDs to indicate:




1) Data transmission2) Device has power3) Status for each load4) Configuration status

d. Quick installation features including:1) Standard junction box mounting2) Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

e. Plenum ratedf. Manual override and LED indication for each loadg. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz)h. Zero cross circuitry for each load.

2. On/Off Room Controllers shall include:a. One or two relay configurationb. Efficient 150 mA switching power supplyc. Three RJ-45 DLM local network portsd. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of

plug loads within the space.e. One relay configuration only

1) Automatic-ON/OFF configurationf. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-101, LMRC-102, LMPL-101

3. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:a. Real time current monitoringb. One, two or three relay configurationc. Efficient 250 mA switching power supplyd. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.e. One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED

drivers.f. Optional Network Bridge for BACnet MS/TP communications (LMRC-3xx).g. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless

configuration tool:1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%2) Set high and low trim for each load3) Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours

h. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space.1) One relay configuration only2) Automatic-ON/OFF configuration

i. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213, LMPL-201, LMRC-311, LMRC-312, LMRC-313.

E. ROOM NETWORK (DLM Local Network)1. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and

communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include:a. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches

and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

b. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.




c. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.

d. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.

F. CONFIGURATIONS TOOLS1. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used

to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

2. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include:a. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range

of approximately 30 feet.b. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-

driven operation.c. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, room controllers and

buttons on digital wall switches.d. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected

sensors.e. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate

those levels in scene setting.3. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product as indicated on Drawings or or Pre-approved comparable product. Submit a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to initial bid date for pre-approval. The listing of manufacturers below does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the basis of design as noted on drawings.

1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.2. Cooper Industries, Inc.3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.5. Lightolier Controls.6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.8. Sensor Switch, Inc.9. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.10. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V,

and 800-W incandescent.




C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag ‘MS’:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.3. Switch Type: SP.4. Voltage: Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V; dual-technology type.5. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.

Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product as indicated on Drawings or or Pre-approved comparable product. Submit a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to initial bid date for pre-approval. The listing of manufacturers below does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the basis of design as noted on drawings.

1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.3. Eaton Corporation.4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total

Lighting Control.5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.6. TORK7. Watstopper (The)

B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination-type lighting contactors complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA

type specified for the enclosure.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Color coding of DLM System conductors shall be: WHITE. Obtain pre-approval of color from owner prior to ordering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

C. When using wire for connections other than the DLM local network (Cat 5e with RJ-45 connectors), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements

D. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.5 PROGRAMMING

A. Mock-Up: Prior to the installation, programming and commissioning of lighting controls throughout the Project, the contractor shall provide a functioning mock-up of the lighting and controls system for each typical space type in the Project including but not limited to conference rooms, corridors, restrooms, patient rooms and operating rooms. An on-site meeting for review and approval of mock-up lighting control settings, sequences, etc. shall be held with Contractor, Manufacturer, Owner, Architect and Engineer representatives prior to remainder of space installation and programming being completed.

B. On a room by room basis, after approved programming is completed and verified, the lighting control system lock-out features on switches, sensors, etc. shall be enabled to prevent accidental re-programming and to maintain programmed scenes and sequences.

C. System switches shall be configured for manual-on (and auto-off) control of associated lighting unless otherwise noted.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings.a. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after

occupant leaves area.

B. Re-commissioning – After 30 days from occupancy re-calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of re-commissioning activity.

C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including room by room description including:1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)




3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

3.8 FACTORY COMMISSIONING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized representative who will verify a complete fully functional system.

B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten working days written notice of the system startup and adjustment date.

C. After commissioning and after switches have been programmed, system lockout features shall be activated such that programming function is locked out to avoid unintentional re-setting of switches.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper training to Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.




262200 – Page 1 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For transformers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.2. General Electric Company.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.2. Coil Material: Aluminum.

F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated.




G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 260544 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

I. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.3. Unit shall meet requirements of NEMA TP 1 when tested according to NEMA TP 2 with a

K-factor equal to one.

K. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor rated transformers.

L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

M. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:1. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA.




2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections.4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections.5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage

connections.6. Applied and induced tensile tests.7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.b. Low-voltage to ground.c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct prototype sound-level tests on production-line products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

2. Brace wall-mounted transformers as specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

C. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.




E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.




262416 – Page 1 PANELBOARDS

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

A. DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:

1. Panelboards shall be installed as shown on the drawings and specified below.

2. Panels shall be dead front type, safety type with a door-in-door hinge and a fully rated and isolated neutral bus with two bolt compression lugs used to terminate feeders, with circuit breakers furnished in sizes as indicated on drawings.

3. The panels shall include an equipment grounding bus.

4. Panels shall be fully rated.

5. Main buses and connectors shall be copper of sufficient current carrying capacity to limit the temperature rise to 65KC per UL tests and have a minimum short circuit rating of 10,000A (120/208V) or 14,000A (277/480V) or as noted on the drawings.

6. All main bus joints, tap connections and contact points shall be silver or tin-plated.

7. Provide a 6” wide x 2” high phenolic nameplate reading the following:

PANELBOARD IDENTIFICATION (5/8” Lettering)___V __Ph __W ____ A (3/8” Lettering)__kAIC FULLY RATED (3/8” Lettering)FED FROM _____ (3/8” Lettering)

8. Fusible Switches and Circuit Breakers: Fusible switches and circuit breakers shall be provided in the sizes and arrangements shown on the drawings. Fusible switches shall accept Class R fuses. Provide a 3” wide x 1” high phenolic nameplate for each switch as follows:

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION (3/8” Lettering)__AS/__AF (XX AMPS WITH/XX AMP FUSE) (1/4” Lettering)

a. The switches shall be provided with a door interlock to prevent access to fuses and switch when energized and manually operated interlock defeat mechanism. The door is to be furnished with “on-off” handle position markings and a means to lock the switch in the open position is to be provided.

9. Manufacturer: The panelboard shall be as manufactured by Square D Company, General Electric, or Eaton Cutler Hammer.

B. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS

1. Panels shall be dead front, safety type, furnished with branch circuit protecting devices, equipment grounding bus, phenolic nameplate, main bus and cable lugs factory assembled, with all components in place, ready for installation.

2. The circuit breakers shall be of the molded case, bolt-on type suitable for voltage and ampere ratings indicated on drawings and in schedules and shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes (120/208V) or 14,000 amperes (277/480V) or as noted on the drawings. Plug-in circuit breakers shall not be allowed.




3. Buses and connectors shall be silver or tin plated hard drawn copper of 98% conductivity, with current carrying capacity to maintain established rise tests as defined in UL Standard UL 67.

4. A directory frame shall be attached to inside face of hinged door. The directory card shall be neatly typed to identify circuits. A transparent plastic facing shall protect the directory card. Room numbers shall be included in directory descriptions. Furnish a copy of each panel directory to the Architect/Engineer.

5. All flush mounted panelboards shall have spare 1” conduits stubbed up out of the panelboard and extended to above an accessible ceiling. Panelboards in interior wall shall have two conduits stubbed out on both sides of the wall (four conduits total). Panelboards in exterior walls shall have three conduits stubbed out into the building interior. Cap conduit ends and label “SPARE”

6. Panelboards to be by Square D Corporation, General Electric Company, or Eaton Cutler Hammer.

C. ISOLATED POWER PANELBOARDS

1. The operating room panels shall be located as indicated on the drawings.

2. The LIM used in these units shall indicate alarm when the total hazard current exceeds 5 mA. The remote indicator alarm unit shall be located in the operating room and connected to the panel supplying power to the circuits in that room.

3. The transformer is to be single-phase, 60 Hz with primary and secondary voltages as listed in the drawings and/or schedule.

4. All circuit breakers must be 2-pole with a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes. Panels shall have a minimum capacity of 16 secondary circuit breakers. Refer to the panelboard schedule for quantity and sizes of breakers. All circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type.

5. Remote Indicator Alarm

b. The remote indicator alarm shall be flush mounted and have a brushed stainless steel front trim. When the hazard current is within the predetermined limit for the circuits being monitored, a constant green light will remain illuminated. When the limit is exceeded, the green light will extinguish, a red indicator will illuminate, and an audible signal will sound.

c. A silencing switch for the audible signal shall be provided. When pressed, it will cause a yellow warning light to illuminate, indicating that the audible signal has been silenced. When the current flow to ground returns to an acceptable level, the unit will automatically reset. The wiring from the LIM to the indicator alarm shall not contribute any leakage current to the isolated system.

6. Wiring

a. Wiring within all panels shall meet all applicable NEC standards. Low leakage insulation shall be used on all secondary wiring. The total leakage for all panel types shall not exceed the values shown in table 29.1 of UL 1047.




b. The panel manufacturer shall provide certified test data on each individual panel as to maximum leakage of each complete assembly.

c. The contractor shall wire all external receptacles to the panels using copper stranded conductor having a cross-linked polyethylene insulation or equivalent with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. Under no circumstances shall wire pulling compound be used when pulling the wire for isolated circuits. All wiring shall be color-coded in accordance with NEC and appropriate NFPA standards.

7. Testing

a. The contractor shall include the cost of, and make all arrangements for, testing all underground isolated systems in the hospital by a qualified factory technician provided by the manufacturer of the isolation systems. The testing shall include a complete inspection of all connections and materials used. The contractor shall be prepared to demonstrate to the factory technician that proper polarity was observed, and installation practices were in accordance with the drawings and specifications for these systems.

b. The factory technician shall check and record system current leakages. The factory technician shall further simulate faults on the isolated system of a magnitude high enough to bring the total system leakage, which the LIM detects, above the calibrated point, thus verifying correct operation of the LIM. The faults simulated shall be combinations of resistive and capacitive faults.

c. The factory technician shall check the resistance between the ground point of each receptacle and the reference point, and it shall be less than 0.1 ohms. The voltage potential difference between any exposed conductive surfaces in the patient vicinity shall be checked, the difference to be no more than 40 millivolts. These tests are required by NFPA No. 99 for new construction areas.

d. After all tests are complete, a letter shall be given to the hospital and the consulting engineer. The letter shall state that the system conforms to all codes, good installation practices, and the specifications.




262726 – Page 1 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Twist-locking receptacles.3. Wall-box motion sensors.4. Hospital-grade receptacles.5. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.6. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.7. Communications outlets.8. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet

assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.





A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. All convenience receptacles to be of the quick connect type to have a right angle connector feature with pre-stripped leads. Connector contacts are to be crimped and welded.

2. Products: Basis of design: Pass & Seymour, PT5362 (duplex)a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cooper.Hubbell2) Leviton

B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 Supplement SD.1. All convenience receptacles to be of the quick connect type to have a right angle

connector feature with pre-stripped leads. Connector contacts are to be crimped and welded.

2. Products: Basis of design: Pass & Seymour, PT2095LA (duplex)




a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1) Cooper.2) Hubbell.3) Leviton.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. When ground fault protection is lost, power to the receptacle is disconnected.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:1. All convenience receptacles to be of the quick connect type to have a right angle

connector feature with pre-stripped leads. Connector contacts are to be crimped and welded.

2. Products: Basis of design: Pass & Seymour, PT2095LA (duplex)a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cooper.2) Hubbell.3) Leviton.

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; L520R.b. Hubbell; HBL2310.c. Leviton; 2310.d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.




1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.7 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

1. Switches not associated with the DLM Lighting system: All Snap switches to be of the quick connect type to have a right angle connector feature with pre-stripped leads. Connector contacts are to be crimped and welded.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:1. Products: Basis of design: Pass & Seymour, PT20AC1 (single pole), PT20AC2 (two

pole), PT20AC3 (three way), PT20AC4 (four way).a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cooper 2) Hubbell.3) Leviton.

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:1. Products: Basis of design: Pass & Seymour, PT20AC1-SL (single pole), PT20AC3-SL

(three way), PT20AC4 (four way).a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cooper.2) Hubbell.3) Leviton.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."5. Wiring Devices Connected to the Critical Power Branch of the Essential Electrical

System: Red with red nylon wall plate.6. Operating Rooms: 0.035 inch thick, Satin-finished Stainless steel wall plates, all circuits.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.




2.9 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories.3. Square D/ Schneider Electric.4. Thomas & Betts Corporation.5. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.

1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ-45 jacks.

2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch cored openings and reestablish fire

rating of floor.5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors

and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 6 voice and data communication cables.

2.10 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.2. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

E. Multi-outlet assemblies only permitted where specifically noted on drawings.

2.11 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Critical Power Branch of the Essential Electrical System: Red.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:




1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.




C. Test straight blade convenience outlets in patient-care areas, hospital-grade convenience outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. 1. Refer to NFPA 99 Section 6.3.2 for Testing Requirements:

a. Visual Inspectionb. Grounding Continuityc. Correct Polarityd. Retention force




262813 – Page 1 FUSES

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in electronic format to be used with SKM software.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.





A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.


E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F , apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class RK1, time delay.2. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay.3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.




262816 – Page 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.




6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit in electronic format to be used with SKM software..

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Manufacturer's field service report.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit in electronic format to be used with SKM software.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.






A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg.2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner per requirements in the front end documents..2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.




2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.6. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.8. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.6. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.




B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.




262923 – Page 1 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes AC motor Variable Frequency Drives rated 600 V and below.


A. Seismic Performance: VFDs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA ICS 7.1 – Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

B. NEMA ICS 7 – Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable –Speed Drives; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

C. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000– Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, short circuit rating, operating characteristics, dimensions, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories.

C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate startup inspection findings.




F. Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the

following:a. Each installed unit's type and details.b. Factory-installed devices.c. Enclosure types and details.d. Nameplate legends.e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit.f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFD and installed

devices.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For VFDs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based,

and their installation requirements.

H. Product Certificates: For each VFD, from manufacturer.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit

breaker and MCP trip settings.2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules.4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status

and alarm points.5. NEMA ICS 7,1: Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.6. NEMA ICS 7,1: Include instructions for starting and operating controllers, and describe

operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.

J. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.




C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience and with service facilities within 130 miles of Project.




D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFD according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F (minus 10 deg C) and not exceeding 104

deg F (40 deg C).2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not

exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C)3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).4. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1005 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Owner per requirements in the front end documents.2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written

permission.3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFDs, including clearances between VFDs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Toshiba: Model Q9 or Model FS1: www.toshiba.com2. ABB: Model ACH550: www.abb.com3. Yaskawa: Model Z1000: www.yaskawa.com

B. Manufacturers other than the above are not allowed

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads, in conformance with requirements of NEMA ICS 7. Select unspecified features and options in accordance with NEMA ICS 3.1.1. Employ microprocessor-based inverter logic isolated from power circuits.2. Employ pulse-width-modulated inverter system.3. Include a DC link reactor for reduction of harmonic distortion.4. The controller, and all associated components, shall be supplied by a single vendor.5. The controller will be operating a variable volume fan motor, or water pump motor for

HVAC application.6. System voltage shall be indicated on front of ASD, using minimum of 1-inch high letters.7. Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for equipment application in places regularly

open to the public. No disconnects in VFD cabinet. Disconnect must be in separate enclosure.

2.3 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

A. Rated Input Voltage for motors rated below 40 HP: 200 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz, with a voltage tolerance of +/- 10% and a frequency tolerance of +/- 2 Hz.

B. Rated Output: Output frequency shall vary between 0.1 Hz and 400 Hz. Frequency resolution shall be 0.01 Hz digital and 0.03 Hz analog with an accuracy of +/-0.2% of maximum frequency at 25 degrees Celsius. Maximum voltage frequency shall be adjustable from 25 Hz to 400 Hz. Voltage boost shall be adjustable from 0% to 30% with starting frequency adjustable from 0 Hz to 10 Hz. The output current shall be 100% continuous and 110% for 60 seconds, based on NEC table 430-150 (Full-Load Current, Three-Phase Alternating Current Motors) for 200 volts or 460 volts.

C. The controller shall contain three critical frequency jump points with individual bandwidth. Upper and lower frequency limits shall be capable of being varied.

D. The PWM carrier frequency shall be adjustable from 5000 Hz to 15000 Hz.

E. The drive shall contain two separate acceleration/deceleration times (0.1 to 6000 seconds) with a choice of linear, S, or C curves. The drive shall have a standard dynamic electric braking for motors rated 30 HP or below. The drive shall restart into a rotating motor by sensing the coasting motor speed and matching that frequency. The drive shall have adjustable soft stall (10%-150%) and adjustable electronic overload protection (10%-100%).

http://www.abb.com/




F. The drive shall have external fault input, be capable of re-setting faults remotely and locally.

G. Input Signal:1. 0 to 10 v DC2. 0 to 5 v DC3. 4 to 20 mA DC

H. Manual bypass is not required on VFD unless indicated on bid documents.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and output current, output power (kw), and motor RPM.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type

12.

B. Disconnects associated with VFD’s shall be in separate enclosure from VFD.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFD installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1, manufacturer's instructions, and per drawings.1. Coordinate layout and installation of VFDs with other construction including conduit,

piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFDs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor unless




otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. General: Install independently mounted Variable Frequency Drive in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the field assembly and connection of components, and supervise the pretesting and adjustment of Variable Frequency Drives.

F. Mounting: For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural steel channels bolted to the wall. For Drives not at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and lightweight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8-inch thick steel plates, 6 inches square, bolted to the floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch by ¼-inch vertical angle posts not over three feet on centers. Connect the posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt the control equipment to the channels

G. Comply with NECA 1.

H. When remote service disconnect is required, provide with auxiliary contacts hardwired to VFD safety circuit to shut down VFD, if disconnect is opened.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate.3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.4. System voltage to be indicated on front of VFD, using minimum 1” high letters.5. Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate

horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place in clear plastic holder.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote device. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.




C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices

that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for

safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally using methods and materials as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Prior to initial energizing, provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start controllers.

B. Perform tests and inspections. Owner shall be provided the opportunity to witness all testing.1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:1. Pre-testing: On completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations

for tests, under the supervision of the factory authorized service representative.a. Clean devices using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.b. Inspect for defects and physical damage, and nameplate compliance with current

project drawings.c. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench.

Use manufacturer's recommended torque values.d. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices.e. Make insulation resistance tests of conducting parts of motor control components;

and of connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. For devices containing solid-state components, use test equipment and methods recommended by the manufacturer.

f. Make continuity tests of circuits.g. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other

operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1) Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and

related work.h. Motor-Control Device Ratings and Settings: Verify that ratings and settings as

installed are appropriate for final loads and final system arrangement and parameters as recommended by Division 15. Recommend final protective-device ratings and settings where differences are found. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make the final system adjustments. Prepare and submit the load current and overload relay heater list.




D. Electrical Tests: Perform the following in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:1. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to the extent

permitted by the manufacturer's instructions. Insulation resistance less than recommended by the manufacturer are unacceptable.a. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices.b. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, lockout, phase unbalance

and undervoltage to verify operation.c. Check for improper voltages at terminals in Drives that have external control wiring

when controller disconnect is opened. Any voltage over 30 V is unacceptable.

E. Correct deficiencies and retest motor control devices. Verify by the system tests that specified requirements are met.

F. Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.

3.8 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE

A. General Requirements: Provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire system for a period of one year after completion of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work. Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and non-scheduled work.

B. Description of Work: The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, software updates, electronic and electrical components, equipment and all sensors and control devices. Provide the manufacturer's required adjustments and all other work necessary.

C. Personnel: Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and satisfactorily. Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel.

D. Emergency Service: Owner will initiate service calls when a Variable Frequency Drive is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service of the complete system, including external controls. Furnish owner with a telephone number where service representative can be reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at the site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service. Restore the Variable Frequency Drive system to proper operating condition within 3 days.

E. Operating: Performance of scheduled adjustments and repair shall verify operation of the system as demonstrated by the initial performance test.

F. Systems Modifications: Provide all recommendations for system modification in writing to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and control settings, without prior approval of Owner. All modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs.




264113 – Page 1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection system for ordinary structures.

B. Section includes lightning protection system for the following:

1. Ordinary structures.

C. Section intended for extension of existing lightning protection system and recertification as it relates to new work on roof.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layouts of the lightning protection system, with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include raceway locations needed for the installation of conductors.3. Details of air terminals, ground rods, ground rings, conductor supports, splices, and

terminations, including concealment requirements.4. Include roof attachment details, coordinated with roof installation.5. Calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of metal bodies.


A. Coordination Drawings: Lightning protection system Shop Drawings, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lightning protection cabling attachments to roofing systems and accessories.2. Lightning protection strike termination device attachment to roofing systems, coordinated

with the roofing system manufacturer.3. Lightning protection system components penetrating roofing and moisture protection

systems and system components, coordinated with the roofing system manufacturer.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.




C. Product Certificates: For each type of roof adhesive for attaching the roof-mounted air terminal assemblies, approved by the roofing-material manufacturer.



A. Maintenance Data: For lightning protection system to include in maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Dimensioned site plan showing dimensioned route of the ground loop conductor and the ground rod locations. Comply with requirements of Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

b. A system testing and inspection record, listing the results of inspections and ground resistance tests, as recommended by NFPA 780, Annex D.

B. Completion Certificate:

1. UL Master Label Certificate for the Entire Patient Care Tower Lightning Protection System.


A. Installer Qualifications: UL-listed installer, category OWAY.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Robins Lightning, Inc.

B. Erico


A. NFPA Lightning Protection Standard: Comply with NFPA 780 requirements for Class II buildings.

B. UL Lightning Protection Standard: Comply with UL 96A requirements for Class II buildings.

C. Lightning Protection Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency as complying with UL 96, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Air Terminals:




1. Copper unless otherwise indicated.2. 5/8-inch diameter by 15 inches long.3. Pointed tip.4. Integral base support.

B. Air Terminal Bracing:

1. Copper.2. 1/4-inch (6-mm) diameter rod.

C. Class II Main Conductors:

1. Stranded Copper: 115,000 circular mils in diameter.

D. Secondary Conductors:

1. Stranded Copper: 26,240 circular mils in diameter.

E. Ground Loop Conductor: Stranded copper.

F. Conductor Splices and Connectors: Compression fittings that are installed with hydraulically operated tools, or exothermic welds, approved for use with the class type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid bends less than 90 degrees and 8 inches (203 mm) in radius and narrow loops.

C. Conceal conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of building. Comply with requirements for concealed installations in UL 96A.

1. Roof penetrations required for down conductors and connections to structural-steel framework shall be made using listed through-roof fitting and connector assemblies with solid rods and appropriate roof flashings. Use materials approved by the roofing manufacturer for the purpose. Conform to the methods and materials required at roofing penetrations of the lightning protection components to ensure compatibility with the roofing specifications and warranty.

2. Install conduit where necessary to comply with conductor concealment requirements.3. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's

written instructions.

D. Ground Ring Electrode: The conductor shall be not less than the main-size lightning conductor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Aboveground concealed connections, and connections in earth or concrete, shall be done by exothermic welds or by high-compression fittings listed for the purpose.




B. Aboveground exposed connections shall be done using the following types of connectors, listed and labeled for the purpose: bolted connectors.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Perform inspections as required to obtain a UL Master Label for the Entire Patient Care Tower Lightning Protection System.

2. Perform inspections to obtain an LPI certification.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports and certificates.




265100 – Page 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.3. Ballast, including BF.




4. Energy-efficiency data.5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a

manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Installation instructions.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures.2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires.4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets.b. Speakers.c. Sprinklers.d. Smoke and fire detectors.e. Occupancy sensors.f. Access panels.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.





C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. (OPERATION AND PATIENT ROOMS)

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 50 emergency lighting unit.

4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7.

B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.

1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 LED LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3500 K unless noted otherwise on drawings.

B. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.

C. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

D. Internal driver.

E. Nominal Operating Voltage: as noted on the drawings.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. Comparable products shall be submitted a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to initial bid date for pre-approval.

2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS


B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

C. User Replaceable Lamps:

a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to




prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

3. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and provide additional capacity in LED power supply and battery for power connection to remote unit.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.




2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage.8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.7 LED LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3500 K unless noted otherwise on drawings.

B. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.

C. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

D. Internal driver.

E. Nominal Operating Voltage: as noted on the drawings.

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.




E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.




270500 – Page 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 270500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Communications equipment coordination and installation.2. Common communications installation requirements.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.4. So connecting pathways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communications items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application and installation as specified in Division 27 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."



270500 – Page 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION


B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves as specified in Division 27 Section “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling.”


A. Install sleeve-seals as specified in Division 27 Section “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling.”

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."




270544 – Page 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND

CABLING

SECTION 270544 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Sleeve-seal fittings.4. Grout.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.1. Use EZ-PATH Smoke and Acoustical Pathways as noted on drawings (or pre-approved

equal)




CABLING

C. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. CALPICO, Inc.c. Metraflex Company (The).d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.


a. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.




CABLING

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway

or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Where noted on drawings, use the EZ-Path smoke and acoustical pathways. (Or pre-approved equal)

2. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.




CABLING

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




283111 – Page 1 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Manual fire-alarm boxes.2. System smoke detectors.3. Heat detectors.4. Notification appliances.5. Magnetic door holders.6. Addressable interface device.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The existing Fire Alarm system is Simplex FireFinder XLS with Digital Voice Evacuation. The intent of this specification is for extension of the existing Fire Alarm System. All devices added shall be of the same manufacturer as the existing building system.1. Provide additional power extender panels as necessary to accommodate additional

devices.2. A single node or system shall support at least 50 remote transponders.3. The existing system is a supervised, noncoded, addressable multiplex fire alarm system

conforming to NFPA 72.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum.c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.




B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide design calculation showing current draw on each notification circuit with allowance for minimum of 20% expansion.

3. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.4. Include battery-size calculations and show that they are sized a minimum of 125% of

calculated requirement.a. Show supervisory power requirements for all equipmentb. Show alarm power requirements for all equipmentc. Show power supply rating justification showing power requirements for each of the

system power supplies. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst case condition.

5. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

6. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

7. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

8. Indicate wattage and speaker tap settings for each speaker in plan.9. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.10. Complete riser diagram including devices with associated tags/room no. and circuits.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.




7. Copy of NFPA 25.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide extension of existing Fire Alarm system and match existing manufacturer. Simplex Grinnell FireFinder XLS series panel.1. Contact Siemens Industry, Building Technologies Division, 2320 Ball Drive, St. Louis, MO

63146, 314-817-1101.

2.2 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL IS EXISTING TO REMAIN.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT: Existing to Remain.

2.4 INTELLIGENT INITIATING DEVICES

A. General1. 1. All initiation devices shall be insensitive to initiating loop polarity. Specifically, the

devices shall be insensitive to plus/minus voltage connections on either Style 4 or Style 6 circuits.




2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with

integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Model # HFP-112. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.3. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Model # AD2-P Series.




2. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

3. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

4. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

5. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.6. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.7. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.7 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F and 15 degrees per minute rate of rise. Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal lag inherent in conventional type detectors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. The choice of alarm reporting as a fixed temperature detector or a combination of fixed and rate of rise shall be made in system software and be changeable at any time without the necessity of hardware replacement.1. Detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for coverage up to 2,500 square feet and

shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area coverage. 2. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Model: HFPT-11.

2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field or 135/185 cd for ceiling mounted.b. Selector switch for selecting candela shall be tamper resistant.




2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.7. Compatible with the Siemens DSC sync modules, FS-250 panel, FireFinder XLS panel,

or PAD-3 power supply with built-in sync protocol when synchronization is required.8. Strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation9. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e. – contacts remain closed), the

strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash rate.10. The Series ST Multi-Candela shall mount to a standard 4 inch square back box or the

Siemens SBL2S back box for surface mounting.11. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.

C. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.2. All speakers shall be designed for a field-selectable input of either 25 or 70 VRMS; with

selectable power taps from 1/8 watt to 2 watts.3. All wall-mounted models shall have listed sound output of up to 89 dBA at 10 feet and a

listed frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz.4. All ceiling mounted models shall have listed sound output of up to 87 dBA at 10 feet and

a listed frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz.5. Speakers shall incorporate a sealed back construction.6. All inputs shall emply terminals that accept #12 to #18 awg wire sizes.7. Strobe intensity, where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, shall have field-

selectable settings, and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 for:a. 15/30/75/110cd (wall mounting)b. 135/185cd (ceiling mounted)

8. Mounting: semirecessed.9. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.10. Provide series speakers and speaker strobes to match existing devices: Siemens SET

series.

2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.




B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal.

2.11 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.




1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.2. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.3. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.4. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.




3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
